projector pa803u/pa723u/pa653u/ pa853w/pa703w/pa903x · risk group 2 of iec 62471-5: 2015. as with...
TRANSCRIPT
Projector
PA803U/PA723U/PA653U/PA853W/PA703W/PA903XUser’s Manual
Please visit our web site for User’s Manual in the latest version:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/pj_manual/lineup.html
• ThePA723UandPA703WarenotdistributedinNorthAmerica.ModelNo.NP-PA803U/NP-PA723U/NP-PA653U/NP-PA853W/NP-PA703W/NP-PA903X
Ver.24/17
• Apple,Mac,MacOS,andMacBookaretrademarksofAppleInc.registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.
• Microsoft,Windows,WindowsVista, InternetExplorer, .NETFrameworkandPowerPointareeithera registeredtrademarkortrademarkofMicrosoftCorporationintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.
• MicroSaverisaregisteredtrademarkofKensingtonComputerProductsGroup,adivisionofACCOBrands.
• AccuBlend,NaViSet,andVirtualRemotearetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofNECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.inJapan,intheUnitedStateandothercountries.
• ThetermsHDMIandHDMIHigh-DefinitionMultimediaInterface,andtheHDMILogoaretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofHDMILicensing,LLCintheUnitedStatesandothercountries.
• DisplayPortandDisplayPortComplianceLogoaretrademarksownedbytheVideoElectronicsStandardsAssocia-tion.
• HDBaseT™isatrademarkofHDBaseTAlliance.
• TrademarkPJLinkisatrademarkappliedfortrademarkrightsinJapan,theUnitedStatesofAmericaandothercountries and areas.
• Blu-rayisatrademarkofBlu-rayDiscAssociation.
• CRESTRONandROOMVIEWareregisteredtrademarksofCrestronElectronics,Inc.intheUnitedStatesandothercountries.
• ExtronandXTPareregisteredtrademarksofRGBSystems,Inc.intheUnitedStates.
• EthernetiseitheraregisteredtrademarkortrademarkofFujiXeroxCo.,Ltd.
• Otherproductandcompanynamesmentionedinthisuser’smanualmaybethetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksof their respective holders.
• VirtualRemoteToolusesWinI2C/DDClibrary,©NicomsoftLtd.
NOTES(1)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualmaynotbereprintedinpartorwholewithoutpermission.
(2)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.
(3)Greatcarehasbeentakeninthepreparationofthisuser’smanual;however,shouldyounoticeanyquestionablepoints,errorsoromissions,pleasecontactus.
(4)Notwithstandingarticle(3),NECwillnotberesponsibleforanyclaimsonlossofprofitorothermattersdeemedtoresultfromusingtheProjector.
i
Important InformationSafety CautionsPrecautionsPleasereadthismanualcarefullybeforeusingyourNECprojectorandkeepthemanualhandyforfuturereference.
CAUTIONToturnoffmainpower,besuretoremovetheplugfrompoweroutlet.Thepoweroutletsocketshouldbeinstalledasneartotheequipmentaspossible,andshouldbeeasilyaccessible.
CAUTIONTOPREVENTSHOCK,DONOTOPENTHECABINET.THEREAREHIGH-VOLTAGECOMPONENTSINSIDE.REFERSERVICINGTOQUALIFIEDSERVICEPERSONNEL.
Thissymbolwarnstheuserthatuninsulatedvoltagewithintheunitmaybesufficienttocauseelectricalshock.Therefore,itisdangeroustomakeanykindofcontactwithanypartinsideoftheunit.
Thissymbolalertstheuserthatimportantinformationconcerningtheoperationandmaintenanceofthisunit has been provided.Theinformationshouldbereadcarefullytoavoidproblems.
WARNING:TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.DONOTUSETHISUNIT’SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDORINANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGSCANBEFULLYINSERTED.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)ThisClassBdigitalapparatuscomplieswithCanadianICES-003.Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,Thehighestsoundpressurelevelislessthan70dB(A)inaccordancewithENISO7779.
CAUTIONAvoiddisplayingstationaryimagesforaprolongedperiodoftime.DoingsocanresultintheseimagesbeingtemporarilysustainedonthesurfaceoftheLCDpanel.Ifthisshouldhappen,continuetouseyourprojector.Thestaticbackgroundfrompreviousimageswilldisappear.
Disposing of your used product
In the European UnionEU-widelegislationasimplementedineachMemberStaterequiresthatusedelectricalandelectronicprod-uctscarryingthemark(left)mustbedisposedofseparatelyfromnormalhouseholdwaste.Thisincludesprojectorsandtheirelectricalaccessories.Whenyoudisposeofsuchproducts,pleasefollowtheguidanceofyourlocalauthorityand/orasktheshopwhereyoupurchasedtheproduct.Aftercollectingtheusedproducts,theyarereusedandrecycledinaproperway.Thiseffortwillhelpusreducethewastesaswellasthenegativeimpacttothehumanhealthandtheenvironmentattheminimumlevel.ThemarkontheelectricalandelectronicproductsonlyappliestothecurrentEuropeanUnionMemberStates.Outside the European UnionIfyouwishtodisposeofusedelectricalandelectronicproductsoutsidetheEuropeanunion,pleasecontactyourlocalauthorityandaskforthecorrectmethodofdisposal.
For EU:Thecrossed-outwheeledbinimpliesthatusedbatteriesshouldnotbeputtothegeneralhouseholdwaste!Thereisaseparatecollectionsystemforusedbatteries,toallowpropertreatmentandrecyclinginaccordancewithlegislation.
According the EU directive 2006/66/EC, the battery can’t be disposed improperly. The battery shall be sepa-rated to collect by local service.
ii
Important Information
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:Handlingthecablessuppliedwiththisproductwillexposeyoutolead,achemicalknowntotheStateofCaliforniatocausebirthdefectsorotherreproductiveharm.WASHHANDSAFTERHANDLING.
RF Interference (for USA only)
WARNINGTheFederalCommunicationsCommissiondoesnot allowanymodificationsor changes to theunitEXCEPTthosespecifiedbyNECDisplaySolutionsofAmerica,Inc.inthismanual.Failuretocomplywiththisgovernmentregulationcouldvoidyourrighttooperatethisequipment.ThisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywiththelimitsforaClassBdigitaldevice,pursuanttoPart15oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedtoprovidereasonableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferenceinaresidentialinstallation.Thisequipmentgenerates,uses,andcanradiateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotinstalledandusedinaccordancewiththeinstructions,maycauseharmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications.However,thereisnoguaranteethatinterferencewillnot occur in a particular installation.Ifthisequipmentdoescauseharmfulinterferencetoradioortelevisionreception,whichcanbedeterminedbyturningtheequipmentoffandon,theuserisencouragedtotrytocorrecttheinterferencebyoneormoreofthefollowingmeasures:
• Reorientorrelocatethereceivingantenna.• Increasetheseparationbetweentheequipmentandreceiver.• Connecttheequipmentintoanoutletonacircuitdifferentfromthattowhichthereceiverisconnected.• Consultthedealeroranexperiencedradio/TVtechnicianforhelp.
ForUKonly:InUK,aBSapprovedpowercordwithmouldedplughasaBlack(fiveAmps)fuseinstalledforusewiththisequipment.Ifapowercordisnotsuppliedwiththisequipmentpleasecontactyoursupplier.
Important SafeguardsThesesafetyinstructionsaretoensurethelonglifeofyourprojectorandtopreventfireandshock.Pleasereadthemcarefullyandheedallwarnings.
Installation• Donotplacetheprojectorinthefollowingconditions:- onanunstablecart,stand,ortable.- nearwater,baths,ordamprooms.- indirectsunlight,nearheaters,orheatradiatingappliances.- inadusty,smokyorsteamyenvironment.- onasheetofpaperorcloth,rugsorcarpets.
• Donotinstallandstoretheprojectorinthebelowcircumstances.Failuretodosomaycauseofmalfunction.- Inpowerfulmagneticfields- Incorrosivegasenvironment- Outdoors
• Ifyouwishtohavetheprojectorinstalledontheceiling:- Donotattempttoinstalltheprojectoryourself.- Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetherisk
of bodily injury.- Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.
- Please consult your dealer for more information.
iii
Important Information
WARNING• Donotcoverthelenswiththelenscaporequivalentwhiletheprojectorison.Doingsocanleadtomeltingof
thecapduetotheheatemittedfromthelightoutput.
• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontoftheprojectorlens.Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingfromtheheatthatisemittedfromthelightoutput.
Thebelowpictogramindicatedonthecabinetmeanstheprecautionforavoidingtoplaceobjectsinfrontoftheprojector lens.
Thisprojectorcanbeinstalledanyanglewithinvertical.Forportraitinstallation,installtheprojectorwiththeintakeventatthebottom.Observeprecautionsforportraitinstallation.* Acustomizedstandisrequiredtobeattachedtotheprojector.(→page150)
130 mm or more
Fire and Shock Precautions • Ensurethatthereissufficientventilationandthatventsareunobstructedtopreventthebuild-upofheatinsideyourprojector.Allowenoughspacebetweenyourprojectorandawall.(→pageviii)
• Donottrytotouchtheexhaustventsontheleftrearandtherear(whenseenfromthefront)asitcanbecomeheatedwhile the projector is turned on and immediately after the projector is turned off. Parts of the projector may become temporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.
Thebelowpictogrammeansthecautiontohotarea.
• Preventforeignobjectssuchaspaperclipsandbitsofpaperfromfallingintoyourprojector.Donotattempttoretrieveanyobjectsthatmightfallintoyourprojector.Donotinsertanymetalobjectssuchasawireorscrewdriverintoyourprojector.Ifsomethingshouldfallintoyourprojector,disconnectitimmediatelyandhavetheobjectremovedbyaqualifiedservicepersonnel.
• Donotplaceanyobjectsontopoftheprojector.• Donottouchthepowerplugduringathunderstorm.Doingsocancauseelectricalshock.• Theprojectorisdesignedtooperateonapowersupplyof100-240VAC50/60Hz.Ensurethatyourpowersupplyfitsthisrequirementbeforeattemptingtouseyourprojector.
• Makesuretomountthepowercordstopperbeforeattemptingtouseyourprojector.Pleaserefertopage15 about the power cord stopper.
iv
Important Information
• Donotlookintothelenswhiletheprojectorison.Seriousdamagetoyoureyescouldresult.Thefollowinglabel,thatisindicatedatthelens-mounting-sectionontheprojectorcabinet,describesthisprojectoriscategorizedintheriskgroup2ofIEC62471-5:2015.Aswithanybrightlightsource,donotstareintothebeam,RG2IEC62471-5:2015.
• Performtheadjustmentfrombehindorfromthesideoftheprojector.Adjustingfromthefrontcouldexposeyoureyestostronglightwhichcouldinjurethem.
• Keepanyitems(magnifyingglassetc.)outofthelightpathoftheprojector.Thelightpathbeingprojectedfromthelensisextensive,thereforeanykindofabnormalobjectsthatcanredirectlightcomingoutofthelens,cancauseanunpredictableoutcomesuchasafireorinjurytotheeyes.
• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontofaprojectorexhaustvent. Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingorgettingyourhandsburnedfromtheheatthatisemittedfromtheexhaust
vent.• Handlethepowercordcarefully.Adamagedorfrayedpowercordcancauseelectricshockorfire.- Donotuseanypowercordotherthantheonesuppliedwiththeprojector. Ifthesuppliedpowercorddoesnotsatisfyrequirementsofyourregion'ssafetystandard,andvoltageandcurrentforyourregion,makesuretousethepowercordthatconformstoandsatisfiesthem.
- Donotbendortugthepowercordexcessively.- Donotplacethepowercordundertheprojector,oranyheavyobject.- Donotcoverthepowercordwithothersoftmaterialssuchasrugs.- Donotheatthepowercord.- Donothandlethepowerplugwithwethands.
• Turnofftheprojector,unplugthepowercordandhavetheprojectorservicedbyaqualifiedservicepersonnelunderthefollowingconditions:- Whenthepowercordorplugisdamagedorfrayed.- Ifliquidhasbeenspilledintotheprojector,orifithasbeenexposedtorainorwater.- Iftheprojectordoesnotoperatenormallywhenyoufollowtheinstructionsdescribedinthisuser’smanual.- Iftheprojectorhasbeendroppedorthecabinethasbeendamaged.- Iftheprojectorexhibitsadistinctchangeinperformance,indicatinganeedforservice.
• Disconnectthepowercordandanyothercablesbeforecarryingtheprojector.• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordbeforecleaningthecabinetorreplacingthelamp.• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordiftheprojectorisnottobeusedforanextendedperiodoftime.• WhenusingaLANcable: Forsafety,donotconnecttotheconnectorforperipheraldevicewiringthatmighthaveexcessivevoltage.
v
Important Information
CAUTION• Donotusethetilt-footforpurposesotherthanoriginallyintended.Misusessuchasgrippingthetilt-footorhang-ingonthewallcancausedamagetotheprojector.
• Donotholdthecablecoverwhilemovingtheprojectorordonotapplyexcessiveforcetothecablecover.Doingsomaydamagethecablecover,resultingininjury.
• Besuretotightenthescrewsafterattachingthecablecover.Failuretodosomaycausethecablecovertocomeoffandfall,resultingininjuryordamagetothecablecover.
• Donotputbundledcablesinthecablecover.Doingsomaydamagethepowercord,resultinginafire.• Select[HIGH]inFanmodeifyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforconsecutivedays.(Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[OPTIONS(1)]→[FANMODE]→[MODE]→[HIGH].)
• Donotmovetheprojectorbyholdingthecablecover.Doingsomayresultintheprojectorfallingorcausinginjury.
• Donotunplugthepowercablefromthewalloutletorprojectorwhentheprojectorispoweredon.DoingsocancausedamagetotheACINterminaloftheprojectorand(or)theprongplugofthepowercable.
ToturnofftheACpowersupplyunderthestatetheprojectorisON,useapowerstripequippedwithaswitchandabreaker.
• DonotturnofftheACpowerfor60secondsafterthelampisturnedonandwhilethePOWERindicatorisblink-ingblue.Doingsocouldcauseprematurelampfailure.
• Thepowerplugmaybeunpluggedfromthesocketafterturningoffthepowersupplyoftheprojector. ImmediatelyafterturningofftheACpowersupplyduringvideoprojection,orafterturningoffthepowersupplyoftheprojector,theprojectorcabinetmaybecomeveryhotmomentarily.Pleasehandlewithcare.
Caution on Handling the Optional LensWhenshippingtheprojectorwiththelens,removethelensbeforeshippingtheprojector.Alwaysattachthedustcaptothelenswheneveritisnotmountedontheprojector.Thelensandthelensshiftmechanismmayencounterdam-agecausedbyimproperhandlingduringtransportation.Donotholdthelenspartwhencarryingtheprojector.Doingsocouldcausethefocusringtorotate,resultinginaccidentaldroppingoftheprojector.Intheconditiontheprojectorisnolensmounted,donotputyourhandsinthelensmountopeningforcarryingtheprojector.Keephandsawayfromthelensmountingportionwhileperformingalensshift.Failuretodosocouldresultinfingersbeingpinchedbythemovinglens.
Remote Control Precautions• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.• Donotthrowbatteriesintofire.• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.• ReplacetwobatteriesatthesametimewiththequitesameonesthathasbeeninstalledintheremotecontrolorAAsizedalkalisbatterythatisconformedtoIEC60086-5.
Note for Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999Thelamp(s)inthisproductcontainsmercury.Pleasedisposeaccordingtoyourlocalauthoritylaw.FORMOREINFORMATION,CONTACT:NECDisplaySolutionsofAmerica,Inc.500ParkBoulevard,Suite1100,Itasca,Illinois60143-1248TELEPHONE800-836-0655www.necdisplay.com
vi
Important Information
Note for US ResidentsThelampinthisproductcontainsmercury.PleasedisposeaccordingtoLocal,StateorFederalLaws.
Lamp Replacement• Usethespecifiedlampforsafetyandperformance.• Toreplacethelamp,followallinstructionsprovidedonpage156.• Besuretoreplacethelampandfilterwhenthemessage[THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE
LIFE. PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP. USE THE SPECIFIED LAMP FOR SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE.] appears.Ifyoucontinuetousethelampafterthelamphasreachedtheendofitsusablelife,thelampbulbmayshatter,andpiecesofglassmaybescatteredinthelampcase.Donottouchthemasthepiecesofglassmaycauseinjury.
Ifthishappens,contactyourdealerforlampreplacement.
A Lamp CharacteristicTheprojectorhasadischargelampforspecialpurposesasalightsource.Alamphasacharacteristicthatitsbrightnessgraduallydecreaseswithage.Alsorepeatedlyturningthelamponandoffwillincreasethepossibilityofitslowerbrightness.
CAUTION:• DONOTTOUCHTHELAMPimmediatelyafterithasbeenused.Itwillbeextremelyhot.Turntheprojectoroffandthendisconnectthepowercord.Allowatleastonehourforthelamptocoolbeforehandling.
• Whenremovingthelampfromaceiling-mountedprojector,makesurethatnooneisundertheprojector.Glassfragmentscouldfallifthelamphasbeenburnedout.
About High Altitude mode• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhigher.
Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]cancausetheprojectortooverheatandtheprotectorcouldshutdown.Ifthishappens,waitacoupleminutesandturn on the projector.
• Usingtheprojectorataltitudeslessthanapproximately5500feet/1700metersandsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]cancausethelamptoovercool,causingtheimagetoflicker.Switch[FANMODE]to[AUTO].
• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofopticalcom-ponents such as the lamp.
About Copyright of original projected pictures:Pleasenotethatusingthisprojectorforthepurposeofcommercialgainortheattractionofpublicattentioninavenuesuchasacoffeeshoporhotelandemployingcompressionorexpansionofthescreenimagewiththefollowingfunc-tionsmayraiseconcernabouttheinfringementofcopyrightswhichareprotectedbycopyrightlaw.[ASPECTRATIO],[KEYSTONE],Magnifyingfeatureandothersimilarfeatures.
Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish marketEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.
vii
Important Information
Health precautions to users viewing 3D images
Beforeviewing,besuretoreadhealthcareprecautionsthatmaybefoundintheuser’smanualincludedwithyour3Deyeglassesoryour3DcompatiblecontentsuchasBlu-rayDiscs,videogames,computer’svideofilesandthelike.Toavoidanyadversesymptoms,heedthefollowing:• Donotuse3Deyeglassesforviewinganymaterialotherthan3Dimages.• Allowadistanceof2m/7feetorgreaterbetweenthescreenandauser.Viewing3Dimagesfromtooclosea
distance can strain your eyes.• Avoidviewing3Dimagesforaprolongedperiodoftime.Takeabreakof15minutesorlongeraftereveryhourofviewing.
• Ifyouoranymemberofyourfamilyhasahistoryoflight-sensitiveseizures,consultadoctorbeforeviewing3Dimages.
• Whileviewing3Dimages,ifyougetsicksuchasnausea,dizziness,queasiness,headache,eyestrain,blurryvision,convulsions,andnumbness,stopviewingthem.Ifsymptomsstillpersist,consultadoctor.
• View3Dimagesfromthefrontofthescreen.Viewingfromananglemaycausefatigueoreyestrain.
AUTO POWER OFF FunctionThefactorydefaultsettingfor[AUTOPOWEROFF]is15minutes.Ifnoinputsignalisreceivedandnooperationisperformedontheprojectorduring15minutes,theprojectorisautomaticallypoweredoffforsavingthepowercon-sumption.Inordertocontroltheprojectorbyanexternaldevice,setthe[AUTOPOWEROFF]to[OFF].Pleasereferpage133 for details.
viii
Important Information
Clearance for Installing the ProjectorAllowampleclearancebetweentheprojectoranditssurroundingsasshownbelow.Thehightemperatureexhaustcomingoutofthedevicemaybesuckedintothedeviceagain.AvoidinstallingtheprojectorinaplacewhereairmovementfromtheHVACisdirectedattheprojector.HeatedairfromtheHVACcanbetakeninbytheprojector'sintakevent.Ifthishappens,thetemperatureinsidetheprojectorwillrisetoohighcausingtheover-temperatureprotectortoautomaticallyturnofftheprojectorspower.
Example 1 – If there are walls on both sides of the projector.
20 cm/7.9" or greater 13 cm/5.1" or greater
Filter cover(Intake vent)
Lamp cover
NOTE:The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the left and right of the projector assuming sufficient clearance has been kept for the front, back and top of the projector.
Example 2 – If there is a wall behind the projector.
10 cm/3.9" or greater
Exhaust vent
NOTE:The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the back of the projector assuming sufficient clearance has been kept for the right, left and top of the projector.
Example 3 – In the case of portrait projection.
Filter cover(Intake vent)
13 cm/5.1" or greater
NOTE:• Thedrawingshowstheproperclearancerequiredforundertheprojectorassumingsufficientclearancehasbeenkeptforthe
front, rear and top of the projector.• Seepage150 for an installation example on portrait projection.
ix
Table of ContentsImportant Information ............................................................................................ i
1. Introduction ...........................................................................................................1❶What’sintheBox? ..........................................................................................................1❷IntroductiontotheProjector ............................................................................................2
CongratulationsonYourPurchaseoftheProjector ...................................................2Installation .................................................................................................................2Videos .......................................................................................................................2Network .....................................................................................................................3Energy-saving ...........................................................................................................3Maintenance .............................................................................................................4Aboutthisuser’smanual ...........................................................................................5
❸PartNamesoftheProjector ...........................................................................................6Front/Top ...................................................................................................................6Rear ..........................................................................................................................8Controls/IndicatorPanel ............................................................................................9Terminals ................................................................................................................10
❹PartNamesoftheRemoteControl ...............................................................................11BatteryInstallation ..................................................................................................12RemoteControlPrecautions ...................................................................................12OperatingRangeforWirelessRemoteControl .......................................................13
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) ...............................................14❶FlowofProjectinganImage .........................................................................................14❷ConnectingYourComputer/ConnectingthePowerCord ..............................................15
Usingthepowercordstopper .................................................................................15❸TurningontheProjector ................................................................................................17
PerformingLensCalibration ...................................................................................17NoteonStartupscreen(MenuLanguageSelectscreen) .......................................18
❹SelectingaSource .......................................................................................................19Selectingthecomputerorvideosource ..................................................................19
❺AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition ........................................................................21Adjustingtheverticalpositionofaprojectedimage(Lensshift) .............................22Focus ......................................................................................................................23Applicablelens:NP30ZL .........................................................................................24Applicablelens:NP11FL .........................................................................................25Applicablelens:NP40ZL/NP41ZL ...........................................................................26Applicablelens:NP43ZL .........................................................................................27Zoom .......................................................................................................................28AdjustingtheTiltFoot ..............................................................................................29
❻OptimizingComputerSignalAutomatically ...................................................................30AdjustingtheImageUsingAutoAdjust ...................................................................30
❼TurningUporDownVolume .........................................................................................30❽TurningofftheProjector ................................................................................................31❾AfterUse .......................................................................................................................32
x
Table of Contents
3. Convenient Features ......................................................................................33❶TurningofftheImageandSound ..................................................................................33❷ShifttheOn-ScreenMenudisplayingposition ..............................................................34❸FreezingaPicture .........................................................................................................35❹EnlargingaPicture .......................................................................................................35❺ChangingEcoMode/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffectUsingEcoMode[ECOMODE] .36
CheckingEnergy-SavingEffect[CARBONMETER] ...............................................37❻CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE] ..................38❼OperationfortheOn-ScreenMenubyacommerciallyavailableUSBmouse ..............40
Menu operation .......................................................................................................40Menu position control ..............................................................................................41Geometriccorrection ...............................................................................................41
❽ PreventingtheUnauthorizedUseoftheProjector[SECURITY] ........................................43❾Projecting3Dvideos .....................................................................................................46
Proceduretowatch3Dvideosusingthisprojector .................................................46Whenvideoscannotbeviewedin3D .....................................................................48
❿ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser ...................................................49⓫StoringChangesforLensShift,Zoom,andFocus[LENSMEMORY]..........................56
Tostoreyouradjustedvaluesin[REF.LENSMEMORY]: .......................................56Tocallupyouradjustedvaluesfrom[REF.LENSMEMORY]: ................................59
4. Multi-Screen Projection ...............................................................................62❶Thingsthatcanbedoneusingmulti-screenprojection ................................................62
Case1.Usingasingleprojectortoprojecttwotypesofvideos[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]..........................................................................................................62Case2.Usingfourprojectors(liquidcrystalpanel:WUXGA)toprojectvideoswitharesolutionof3840×2160pixels[TILING] ....................................................63Thingstonotewheninstallingprojectors ................................................................65
❷DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime ...................................................................66Projectingtwoscreens ............................................................................................67Switchingthemaindisplaywiththesub-displayandviceversa .............................68Restrictions .............................................................................................................69
❸DisplayingaPictureUsing[EDGEBLENDING] ...........................................................70Settingtheoverlapofprojectionscreens ................................................................71[BLENDCURVE].....................................................................................................73BlackLevelAdjustment ...........................................................................................74
5. Using On-Screen Menu .................................................................................76❶UsingtheMenus ...........................................................................................................76❷MenuElements .............................................................................................................77❸ListofMenuItems ........................................................................................................78❹MenuDescriptions&Functions[INPUT] ......................................................................84❺MenuDescriptions&Functions[ADJUST] ...................................................................88
[PICTURE] ..............................................................................................................88[IMAGEOPTIONS] .................................................................................................92[VIDEO] ...................................................................................................................96[3DSETTINGS] ......................................................................................................98UsingtheLensMemoryFunction[LENSMEMORY] ..............................................99
xi
Table of Contents
❻MenuDescriptions&Functions[DISPLAY] ................................................................ 101[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE] ............................................................................... 101[GEOMETRICCORRECTION] .............................................................................103[EDGEBLENDING] ..............................................................................................108[MULTISCREEN]..................................................................................................109
❼MenuDescriptions&Functions[SETUP] ....................................................................111[MENU(1)] ..............................................................................................................111[MENU(2)] ............................................................................................................. 113[INSTALLATION] ................................................................................................... 114[CONTROL] .......................................................................................................... 118[NETWORKSETTINGS] .......................................................................................125[SOURCEOPTIONS] ...........................................................................................130[POWEROPTIONS] .............................................................................................132ReturningtoFactoryDefault[RESET] ..................................................................134
❽MenuDescriptions&Functions[INFO.] .....................................................................136[USAGETIME] ......................................................................................................136[SOURCE(1)] ........................................................................................................137[SOURCE(2)] ........................................................................................................137[SOURCE(3)] ........................................................................................................137[SOURCE(4)] ........................................................................................................138[WIREDLAN] ........................................................................................................138[VERSION] ............................................................................................................138[OTHERS] .............................................................................................................139[CONDITIONS] .....................................................................................................139[HDBaseT] ............................................................................................................140
6. Connecting to Other Equipment ...........................................................141❶Mountingalens(soldseparately) ...............................................................................141
Mountingthelens..................................................................................................141Removingthelens ................................................................................................142
❷MakingConnections ...................................................................................................143AnalogRGBsignalconnection .............................................................................143DigitalRGBsignalconnection ..............................................................................144ConnectingComponentInput ...............................................................................146ConnectingHDMIInput .........................................................................................147ConnectingtoaHDBaseTtransmissiondevice(soldcommercially) ....................148Connectingseveralprojectors ..............................................................................149Portraitprojection(verticalorientation) .................................................................150ConnectingtoaWiredLAN ...................................................................................152
7. Maintenance .....................................................................................................153❶CleaningtheFilters .....................................................................................................153❷CleaningtheLens.......................................................................................................155❸CleaningtheCabinet ..................................................................................................155❹ReplacingtheLamp ....................................................................................................156❺Replacingthefilters ....................................................................................................160
xii
Table of Contents
8. Appendix ..............................................................................................................162❶Throwdistanceandscreensize .................................................................................162
Lenstypesandthrowdistance .............................................................................162Tablesofscreensizesanddimensions .................................................................166Lensshiftingrange ................................................................................................167
❷CompatibleInputSignalList .......................................................................................169❸Specifications .............................................................................................................172❹CabinetDimensions ...................................................................................................175❺Mountingthecablecover(soldseparately) ................................................................176❻Pinassignmentsandsignalnamesofmainconnectors .............................................177❼ChangingtheBackgroundLogo(VirtualRemoteTool) ...............................................179❽Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................180
Featureofeachindicator ......................................................................................180IndicatorMessage(Statusmessage) ...................................................................180IndicatorMessage(Errormessage) ......................................................................182ExplanationonthePOWERindicatorandstandbystate ......................................183CommonProblems&Solutions ............................................................................185Ifthereisnopicture,orthepictureisnotdisplayedcorrectly. ...............................187
❾PCControlCodesandCableConnection ..................................................................188❿TroubleshootingCheckList .........................................................................................191⓫REGISTERYOURPROJECTOR!(forresidentsintheUnitedStates,Canada,and
Mexico) .................................................................................................................193
1
1. Introduction❶ What’s in the Box?Makesureyourboxcontainseverythinglisted.Ifanypiecesaremissing,contactyourdealer.Pleasesavetheoriginalboxandpackingmaterialsifyoueverneedtoshipyourprojector.
Projector
Dust cap for lens (24F53241)* The projector is shipped without
a lens. For the types of lens and throw distances, see page 162.
Remote control(7N901081)
AA alkaline batteries (x2)
Input selection char-acter sticker
Power cord(US: 7N080241)(EU: 7N080022)
Power cord stopper(24F53221/24F53231)For the preventive mea-sure from dropping off the power cord.
Lens theft prevention screw (24V00941)This screw makes it difficult to remove the lens mounted on the projector. (→ page 142)
Straps (for preventing the lamp cover and the filter cover from fall-ing down) (24F54161, 24F54151)Attaching the straps to the lamp cover and the filter cover prevents them from falling when the projec-tor is suspended from the ceiling.
For North America onlyLimited warrantyFor customers in Europe: You will find our current valid Guar-antee Policy on our Web Site: www.nec-display-solutions.com• ImportantInfomation(ForNorth
America: 7N8N7661)• QuickSetupGuide(ForNorth
America: 7N8N7672) (For Other countries than North America: 7N8N7672 and 7N8N7681)
NEC Projector CD-ROMUser’s manual (PDF)(7N952552)
2
1. Introduction
❷ Introduction to the ProjectorThissectionintroducesyoutoyournewprojectoranddescribesthefeaturesandcontrols.
Congratulations on Your Purchase of the ProjectorThisprojectorisoneoftheverybestprojectorsavailabletoday.Theprojectorenablesyoutoprojectpreciseimagesupto500inchesacross(measureddiagonally)fromyourPCorMaccomputer(desktopornotebook),VCR,Blu-rayplayer,ordocumentcamera.Youcanusetheprojectoronatabletoporcart,youcanusetheprojectortoprojectimagesfrombehindthescreen,andtheprojectorcanbepermanentlymountedonaceiling*1.Theremotecontrolcanbeusedwirelessly.
*1 Donotattempttomounttheprojectoronaceilingyourself.
Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetheriskof bodily injury.
Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.
Installation
• Liquidcrystaltypehighbrightness/highresolutionprojector
Model Brightness Resolution AspectRatioPA803U 8000lm WUXGA(1920×1200) 16:10PA723U 7200lm WUXGA(1920×1200) 16:10PA653U 6500lm WUXGA(1920×1200) 16:10PA853W 8500lm WXGA(1280×800) 16:10PA703W 7000lm WXGA(1280×800) 16:10PA903X 9000lm XGA(1024×768) 4:3
• Widerangeofoptionallensesselectableaccordingtotheplaceofinstallation
Thisprojectorsupportseighttypesofoptionallenses,providingaselectionoflensesadaptedtoavarietyofplacesof installation and projection methods.
Inaddition,thelensescanbemountedandremovedinonetouch.
Notethatnolensismounteduponshipmentfromthefactory.Pleasepurchaseoptionallensesseparately.
• Motorizedlenscontrolfunctionforeasilyadjustingthepositionoftheprojectedimage
Thepositionoftheprojectedimage(lensshift)canbeadjustedbybuttonseitheronthecontrolpanelonthesideface of the cabinet or the remote control.
• 360°installationangle(tilt-free)
Theprojectorcanbeinstalledatanyangle(360°)however,theprojectorcannotbeinstalledtiltedtotheleftorright.
• Portraitprojectionispossible
Thisprojectorcanperformportraitprojectionwiththeprojectionscreenturned90°.
Videos
• Widerangeofinput/outputterminals(HDMI,DisplayPort,HDBaseT,etc.)
Theprojectorisequippedwithavarietyofinput/outputterminals:HDMI(input×2),DisplayPort,HDBaseT(inputx1,outputx1),computer(analog),etc.
Theprojector’sHDMIinput,DisplayPortinputterminalsandHDBaseTPortssupportHDCP.
• HDMIandHDBaseTsupportHDCP2.2/1.4
• DisplayPortsupportsHDCP1.4
3
1. Introduction
• Simultaneousdisplayof2images(PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE)
Twoimagescanbeprojectedsimultaneouslywithasingleprojector.
Therearetwotypesoflayoutsforthetwoimages:“picture-in-picture”inwhichasub-pictureisdisplayedonthemainpicture,and“picture-by-picture”inwhichthemainandsubpicturesaredisplayednexttoeachother.
• Multi-screenprojectionusingmultipleprojectors
ThisprojetorequipstheHDBaseTIN/EthernetandHDBaseTOUT/Ethernetports.MultipleprojectorsinsamebrightnessandresolutionuptofourunitscanbeconnetedinadaisychainbyaLAN*1 cable via these terminals withoutavideocable.Ahighqualitypictureisachievedbydividingandprojectinghighresolutionvideosamongthe various projectors.
Furthermore,theboundariesofthescreensaresmoothedusinganedgeblendingfunction.
*1 UseacommerciallyavailableCAT5eSTPcableoroneinahigherspecification.
• Seamlessswitchfunctionforsmootherscreenchangeswhenswitchingthesignal
Whentheinputconnectorisswitched,theimagedisplayedbeforeswitchingisheldsothatthatthenewimagecanbeswitchedtowithoutabreakduetoabsenceofasignal.
• SupportsHDMI3Dformat
Thisprojectorcanbeusedtowatchvideosin3Dusingcommercially-availableactiveshutter-type3Deyewearand3DemittersthatsupportXpand3D.
Network
• SupportswiredLAN
EquipstheLANandHDBaseT/Ethernet(RJ-45)ports.UtilizingawiredLANconnectedwiththeseports,itenablesto control the projector by a computer.
• CRESTRONROOMVIEWandExtronXTPcompatibility
TheprojectorsupportsCRESTRONROOMVIEWandExtronXTP,allowingmultipledevicesconnected in thenetworktobemanagedandcontrolledfromacomputerMoreover,itenablestooutputandcontrolimageviaanExtronXTPtransmitterconnectedwiththeprojector..
• Convenientutilitysoftware(UserSupportware)providedasstandard
Thisprojectorsupportsourutilitysoftware(NaViSetAdministrator2,VirtualRemoteTool,etc.). NaViSetAdministrator2helpsyoucontroltheprojectorbyacomputerviawiredLANconnection.
VirtualRemoteToolhelpsyouperformoperationsbyavirtualremotecontrolsuchasprojector'spoweronoroffandsignalselectionviawiredLANconnection.Moreover,ithasfunctiontosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthelogodata.
Pleasevisitourwebsitefordownloadingeachsoftware.
URL:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html
Energy-saving
• Energy-savingdesignwithastandbypowerconsumptionof0.15W(100-130VAC)/0.21W(200-240VAC)
Whentheon-screenmenu’sstandbymodeissetto“NORMAL”,thepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodeac-tivatingthePowerManagementis0.15W(100-130VAC)/0.21W(200-240VAC)and0.11W(100-130VAC)/0.16W(200-240VAC)whenLANisineffective.
• “Ecomode”forlowpowerconsumptionand“CarbonMeter”display
Theprojector is equippedwith an “ecomode” for reducingpower consumptionduringuse.Furthermore, thepower-savingeffectwhentheecomodeissetisconvertedintotheamountofreductionsofCO2 emissions and thisisindicatedontheconfirmationmessagedisplayedwhenthepoweristurnedoffandat“Information”ontheon-screenmenu(CARBONMETER).
4
1. Introduction
Maintenance
• Maximumreplacementtimeforthelampis5000hoursandforthefilteris10000hours.
Whenusedintheecomode,thelampreplacementtime*isextendedtoamaximumof5000hours.
*Thistimeisnotguaranteed.
Atthesametime,themaximumusagetimeforthefilteris10000hours.**
**Itisvarydependingontheprojectorinstallationcircumstances.
* Actualmenusmaybedifferentfromthemenuimagesinthisuser’smanual.
5
1. Introduction
About this user’s manualThefastestwaytogetstartedistotakeyourtimeanddoeverythingrightthefirsttime.Takeafewminutesnowtoreviewtheuser’smanual.Thismaysaveyoutimelateron.Atthebeginningofeachsectionofthemanualyou’llfindanoverview.Ifthesectiondoesn’tapply,youcanskipit.
Notation by ResolutionTheseindicatethedescriptionsofthemodelgroupsaccordingtotheresolutionoftheliquidcrystalpanels.WUXGATypeApplicabletomodelsPA803U/PA723U/PA653U.WXGATypeApplicabletomodelsPA853W/PA703W.XGATypeApplicabletomodelsPA903X.*Thedescriptionappliestoallmodelsifthetypenameisnotindicated.
How to Differentiate the Model GroupP A 8 0 3 U “U”referstoaWUXGAtype.“W”referstoaWXGAtype.“X”referstoaXGAtype.
ModelNameSymbol
Example:PA803U“NP-”isnotindicatedontopofthecabinet.
6
1. Introduction
❸ Part Names of the ProjectorFront/TopThelensissoldseparately.ThedescriptionbelowisforwhentheNP13ZLlensismounted.
Controls(→ page 9)
Lens
Remote Sensor (located on the front and the rear)(→ page 13)
Remote Sensor(→ page 13)
Zoom Lever/Zoom Ring (→ page 28)
Lens Cap(The optional lens is shipped with the lens cap.)
Focus Ring(→ page 23)
Adjustable Tilt Foot (→ page 29)
Indicator Section(→ page 9)
Lens Release Button(→ page 142)
Adjustable Tilt Foot(→ page 29)
Exhaust ventHeated air is exhausted from here.
Mounting the strapBeforestartingtouse,mountthestrapstothelampcoverandthefiltercoverforpreventingthemfromdroppingdown.
Lamp coverPreparation:Removethelampcoverfromtheprojector.Refertotheclause“Replacingthelamp”onpage156 about the lamp cover installation.
1. Insert the L-shaped part of the lamp cover strap (flat resinoid strap) to the protruded section on the rear face of the lamp cover as the below illustration.
Hole for fixing the strap
2. Insert the opposite side of the lamp cover strap to the hole on the projector body.
Lamp Cover (→ page 156)
Security Bar Attach an anti-theft device.
The security bar accepts security wires or chains up to 0.18 inch/4.6
mm in diameter.
7
1. Introduction
Filter coverPreparation:Removethefiltercoverfromtheprojector.Refertotheclause“Replacingthefilter”onpage160aboutthefiltercoverinstallation.
1. Insert the round protrusion at the filter cover strap end (resinoid strap) to the hole on the filter cover.
2. Insert the square protrusion at the opposite end of the filter cover strap to the hole on the projector body and rotate the strap 90°for fixation. It becomes easier to fix the strap if you remove the filter once.
Hole for fixing the strap
Rotate the strap 90°
How to paste the input selection character sticker of the remote control• PeeloffthecoverofthestickerandalignthestickerholeswithButtons1to6beforepasting.
• Pleasetakecarenottoletthestickercontactthebuttonswhenpasting.
• Theexplanationsandillustrationsinthismanualareprovidedwiththestickerpasted.
8
1. Introduction
Terminals(→ page 10)
RearRemote Sensor (located on the front and the rear)(→ page 13)
AC IN TerminalConnect the supplied power cord’s three-pin plug here, and plug the other end into an active wall outlet. (→ page 15)
* ThissecurityslotsupportstheMicroSaver®SecuritySystem.
Built-in Security Slot ( )*
Cable cover connection (right and left)
Screw holes and grooves for the optional cable cover
(→ page 176)
Intake vent / Filter(→ page 153, 160)
Exhaust ventHeated air is exhausted from here.
9
1. Introduction
Controls/Indicator Panel
2 3 4 5
107
8
1
6
9
11 12 13
1. (POWER)Button (→page17,31)
2. POWER Indicator (→page16,17,31,180,183)
3. STATUS Indicator (→page180)
4. LAMPIndicator (→page156,180)
5. TEMP.Indicator (→page36,180)
6. INPUT Button (→page19)
7. MENU Button (→page76)
8. ▲▼◀▶/VolumeButtons◀▶ (→page30,76)
9. ENTER Button (→page76)
10.EXITButton (→page76)
11. FOCUS Button (→page26)
12. ZOOM/L-CALIB. Button (→page28)
13. SHIFT/HOME POSITION Button (→page22)
10
1. Introduction
Terminals
2 73 1 4 5
81112 13 10
6 9
1. HDMI1INTerminal(TypeA) (→page144,145,147)
2. HDMI2INTerminal(TypeA) (→page144,145,147)
3. DisplayPort IN Terminal (→page144)
4. COMPUTERIN/ComponentInputTerminal(MiniD-Sub15Pin)
(→page143,146)
5. COMPUTERAUDIOINMiniJack(StereoMini) (→page143,145)
6. HDBaseTIN/EthernetPort(RJ-45) (→page148,149)
7. HDBaseT OUT/EthernetPort(RJ-45) (→page63,149)
8. AUDIOOUTMiniJack(StereoMini) (→page143,145,147)
9. USB-APort(TypeA) (→page122)
10. LANPort(RJ-45) (→page152)
11. 3DSYNCTerminal(MiniDIN3Pin) (→page46)
12.PCCONTROLPort(D-Sub9Pin) (→page178) Use this port to connect aPC or control system.
Thisenablesyoutocontroltheprojectorusingserialcommunicationprotocol.Ifyouarewritingyourownprogram,typicalPCcontrolcodesareonpage188.
13.REMOTETerminal(StereoMini) Use this terminal for wired remote control of the pro-
jectorusingtheNECremotecontrol,RD-465E. Connect theprojectorandour remotecontrol,RD-
465E,usingacommerciallyavailablewiredremotecontrol cable.
NOTE: • Whenaremotecontrolcable isconnectedtotheREMOTE
terminal, infrared remote control operations cannot be per-formed.
• When [HDBaseT] is selected in the [REMOTE SENSOR]and the projector is connected to a commercially-available transmissiondevicethatsupportsHDBaseT,remotecontroloperations in infra-red cannot be carried out if transmission of remote control signals has been set up in the transmission device.However,remotecontrolusinginfraredrayscanbecarried out when the power supply of the transmission device is switched off.
11
1. Introduction
❹ Part Names of the Remote Control9. Edge Blend. Button (→page71)
10. Multi. Button (→page109)
11. Geometric. Button (→page38,103)
12. INPUT Button (→page19)
13. PIP Button (→page67)
14.PBP/POPButton (→page67)
15.AUTOADJ.Button (→page30)
16.1(HDMI1)Button (→page19)
17. 2(HDMI2)Button (→page19)
18.3(DisplayPort)Button (→page19)
19.4(Computer)Button
(→page19)
20.5(HDBaseT)Button (→page19)
21. 6 Button (not available on this series of
projectors)
22. 7 Button (not available on this series of
projectors)
23. 8 Button
(not available on this series of projectors)
24.9Button (not available on this series of
projectors)
25.IDSETButton (→page123)
26. Numeric Keypad Button/CLEAR Button
(→page123)
27. MENU Button (→page76)
1. Infrared Transmitter (→page13)
2. POWER ON Button (→page17)
3. STANDBY Button (→page31)
4. FREEZEButton (→page35)
5. BLANKButton (→page33)
6. MUTE Button (→page33)
7. AV-MUTEButton (→page33)
8. TEST Button (→page84)
28.EXITButton (→page76)
29. ▲▼◀▶ Button (→page76)
30. ENTER Button (→page76)
31. L-CLICK Button*
32. R-CLICK Button*
33.VOL./FOCUS(+)(−)Button (→page26) (Works only when NP40ZL,
NP41ZL,orNP43ZLismounted)
34.D-ZOOM/ZOOM(+)(−)Button (→page35) (Works only when NP40ZL,
NP41ZL,orNP43ZLismounted)
35.SHUTTERButton (not available on this series of
projectors)
36. LENS SHIFT Button (→page22)
37. PICTURE Button (→page88)
38. DISPLAY Button (→page101)
39. ASPECT Button (→page94)
40.COLORButton (→page90)
41.3DSet.Button (→page46)
42.SETUPButton (→page111)
43.CTLButton (→page26,28,34)
44.ECOButton (→page36)
45.INFOButton (→page137)
46.HELPButton (→page136)
1
35489
1213
26711101514
16
1922
2523
17
27
31
33
35
30
21
28
29
20
32
2426
18
34
36
43
44
4645
374038
4241
39
* The▲▼◀▶,L-CLICKandR-CLICKbuttonsworkonlywhenaUSBcableisconnectedwithyourcomputer.
12
1. Introduction
Battery Installation1. Press the catch and remove
the battery cover.2. Install new ones (AA). En-
sure that you have the bat-teries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.
3. Slipthecoverbackoverthebatteriesuntilit snaps into place.
NOTE:Donotmixdifferenttypesofbatteriesornewand old batteries.
1
2 12
Remote Control Precautions
• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.
• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.
• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.
• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.
• Donotthrowbatteriesintofire.
• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.
• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.
• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.
• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.
• ReplacetwobatteriesatthesametimewiththequitesameonesthathasbeeninstalledintheremotecontrolorAAsizedalkalisbatterythatisconformedtoIEC60086-5.
13
1. Introduction
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control
40 m/1575 inch
40 m/1575 inch
Remote control
Remote sensor on projector cabinet
40 m/1575 inch
40 m/1575 inch
20 m/787 inch
20 m/787 inch
20 m/787 inch
20 m/787 inch
15 m/591 inch
15 m/591 inch
15 m/591 inch
15 m/591 inch
• Theinfraredsignaloperatesbyline-of-sightuptoadistanceofabovemetersandwithina60-degreeangleoftheremote sensor on the projector cabinet.
• Theprojectorwillnotrespondifthereareobjectsbetweentheremotecontrolandthesensor,orifstronglightfallsonthesensor.Weakbatterieswillalsopreventtheremotecontrolfromproperlyoperatingtheprojector.
14
Thissectiondescribeshowtoturnontheprojectorandtoprojectapictureontothescreen.
❶ Flow of Projecting an Image
Step 1• Connectingyourcomputer/Connectingthepowercord(→page15)
Step 2 • Turningontheprojector(→page17)
Step 3 • Selectingasource(→page19)
Step 4• Adjustingthepicturesizeandposition(→page21)
• Correctingkeystonedistortion[CORNERSTONE](→page38, 103)
Step 5• Adjustingapictureandsound
- Optimizing a computer signal automatically (→ page 30)
- Turning up or down volume (→ page 30)
Step6• Makingapresentation
Step 7• Turningofftheprojector(→page31)
Step 8• Afteruse(→page32)
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
15
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❷ Connecting Your Computer/Connecting the Power Cord
1.Connectyourcomputertotheprojector.
This section will show you a basic connection to a computer. For information about other connections, see “(2) Making Connections” on page 143.
Connect the display output terminal (mini D-sub 15 pin) on the computer to the computer video input terminal on the projector with a commercially-available computer cable (with ferrite core) and then turn the knobs of the connectors to secure them.
2.Connectthesuppliedpowercordtotheprojector.
First connect the supplied power cord’s three-pin plug to the AC IN terminal of the projector, and then connect another plug of the supplied power cord directly in the wall outlet. Do not use any plug converter.
Using the power cord stopperTopreventthepowercordfromaccidentlyremovingfromtheACINoftheprojector,usethepowercordstopper.
CAUTION• Topreventthepowercordfromcomingloose,makesurethatalltheprongsofthepowercordplugarefullyin-sertedintotheACINterminaloftheprojectorbeforeusingthepowercordstopper.Aloosecontactofthepowercordmaycauseafireorelectricshock.
Thepowercordstopperisconsistedfromthepart(A)thatshouldbeinstalledontheprojectorandthepart(B)thatshould be installed on the power cord.1. Fixthepart(A)totheACINterminalontheprojector
cabinet.
Part (A)
2. Fixthepart(B)tothepowercord. Part (B)
3. InsertthepowercordplugtotheACINterminaluntilthe power cord stopper is fastened completely and clicksoundisheard.
16
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Upon connecting the power cable, the POWER indicator of the projector will light in green. If there are no input signals, the device will go into the standby state.
(In the state, standby mode is NORMAL.) (→ page 183)
COMPUTER IN
Make sure that the prongs are fully inserted into both the AC IN and the wall outlet.
To wall outlet
Computer cable (with ferrite core) (sold commercially)
CAUTION:PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.
17
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❸ Turning on the Projector
1.Removethelenscap.
2. Press the (POWER)buttonontheprojectorcabinetorthePOWERONbuttonontheremotecontrol.
The POWER indicator lit in green will start to blink in blue. After that, the image will be projected onto the screen.
TIP: • Whenthemessage“PROJECTORISLOCKED!ENTERYOURPASSWORD.” is displayed, itmeans that the [SECURITY]feature is turned on. (→ page 43)
• When theECOmessage is displayed, itmeans that [ON] isselectedfor[ECOMESSAGE].(→ page 112)
After you turn on your projector, ensure that the computer or video source is turned on.
NOTE: A blue screen (blue background) is displayed when no signal is being input (by factory default menu settings).
Sleep state Blinking Power On
Blinking in green Blinking blue light
Steady blue light
(→page180)
Performing Lens Calibration Aftermountingtheseparatelyavailablelensunitorreplacingalensunit,perform[LENSCALIBRATION]byholdingtopressZOOM/L-CALIB.buttononthecabinetovertwoseconds.Calibration corrects the adjustable zoom, shift, and focusrange.Ifcalibrationisnotperformed,youmaynotbeabletogetthebestfocusandzoomevenifyouadjustthefocusandzoomforthelens.
18
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)Whenyoufirstturnontheprojector,youwillgettheStartupmenu.Thismenugivesyoutheopportunitytoselectoneofthe29menulanguages.
To select a menu language, follow these steps:
1. Use the ▲, ▼, ◀ or ▶ button to select one of the 30 languagesfromthemenu.
2.PresstheENTERbuttontoexecutetheselection.
After this has been done, you can proceed to themenuoperation.Ifyouwant,youcanselectthemenulanguagelater.(→[LANGUAGE]onpage80 and 111)
NOTE: • Ifthemessage,[PLEASESET"DATEANDTIME".]isshown,pleasesetthecurrentdateandtime.(→ page 122)• Inthecasethismessageisnotshown,the[DATEANDTIMESETTING]isrecommendedtocomplete.• Duringprojection,aftershuttingdownthepowersupply(directpoweroff),waitforabout1minuteorlongerbeforeturningon
the power again.• Keepthelenscapoffthelenswhiletheprojector’spowerison. If the lens cap is on, it could be warped due to high temperature.• Ifoneofthefollowingthingshappens,theprojectorwillnotturnon.
- If the internal temperature of the projector is too high, the projector detects abnormal high temperature. In this condition the projectorwillnotturnontoprotecttheinternalsystem.Ifthishappens,waitfortheprojector’sinternalcomponentstocooldown.
- IftheSTATUSindicatorlightsorangewiththepowerbuttonpressed,itmeansthatthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon.Cancelthelockbyturningitoff.(→ page 122)
- Ifthelampfailstolight,andifthePOWERindicatorblinksinredandtheLAMPindicatorlightsinred,waitafullminuteandthen turn on the power.
• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoffbyusingthepowerbutton.• Immediatelyafterturningontheprojector,screenflickermayoccur.Thisisnormal.Wait3to5minutesuntilthelamplightingis
stabilized.• Whentheprojectoristurnedon,itmaytakesometimebeforethelamplightbecomesbright.• Ifyouturnontheprojectorimmediatelyafterthelampisturnedofforwhenthetemperatureishigh,thefansrunwithoutdisplay-
ing an image for some time and then the projector will display the image.
19
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❹ Selecting a SourceSelecting the computer or video sourceNOTE: Turn on the computer or video source equipment connected to the projector.
Detecting the Signal AutomaticallyPresstheINPUTbuttonfor1secondorlonger.Theprojectorwillsearchfortheavailableinputsourceanddisplayit.Theinputsourcewillchangeas follows:
HDMI1→HDMI2→DisplayPort→COMUPTER→HDBaseT→HDMI1→ …
• Pressitbrieflytodisplaythe[INPUT]screen.
Press the ▼/▲buttonstomatchthetargetinputterminalandthenpresstheENTERbuttontoswitchtheinput.Todeletethemenudisplayinthe[INPUT]screen,presstheMENUorEXITbutton.
TIP: If no input signal is present, the input will be skipped.
Using the Remote ControlPressanyoneofthe1/HDMI1,2/HDMI2,3/DisplayPort,4/Computer,or5/HDBaseTbutton.
20
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Selecting Default Source Youcansetasourceasthedefaultsourcesothatitwillbedisplayedeachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.
1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[BASIC].3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SOURCEOPTIONS]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbutton.4. Press the ▼buttonthreetimestoselect[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [DEFAULT INPUT SELECT] screen will be displayed.
(→ page 130)
5. Selectasourceasthedefaultsource,andpresstheENTERbutton.
6.PresstheEXITbuttonafewtimestoclosethemenu.
7.Restarttheprojector.
The source you selected in step 5 will be projected.
NOTE:Evenwhen[AUTO]isturnedon,the[HDBaseT]willnotbeautomaticallyselected.Tosetyournetworkasthedefaultsource,select[HDBaseT].
TIP: • WhentheprojectorisinStandbymode,applyingacomputersignalfromacomputerconnectedtotheCOMPUTERINinputwillpowerontheprojectorandsimultaneouslyprojectthecomputer’simage.
([AUTOPOWERONSELECT]→ page 132)• OntheWindows7keyboard,acombinationoftheWindowsandPkeysallowsyoutosetupexternaldisplayeasilyandquickly.
21
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❺ Adjusting the Picture Size and PositionUsethelensshiftdial,theadjustabletiltfootlever,thezoomandthefocusringtoadjustthepicturesizeandposition.In this chapter drawings and cables are omitted for clarity.
Adjustingtheprojectedimage’sverticalandhorizontalposition[Lensshift](→page22)
Adjustingthefocus[Focusring](→page23)
Finelyadjustingthesizeofanimage(→page28)
Adjustingtheprojectedimage’sinclination[Tiltfoot]*¹(→page29)
NOTE*1:Adjusttheprojectedimage’sheightusingthetiltfeetwhenyouwanttoprojecttheimageatapositionhigherthanthelensshift adjustment range.
22
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Adjusting the vertical position of a projected image (Lens shift)
CAUTION• Performtheadjustmentfrombehindorfromthesideoftheprojector.Adjustingfromthefrontcouldexposeyoureyestostronglightwhichcouldinjurethem.
• Keephandsawayfromthelensmountingportionwhileperformingalensshift.Failuretodosocouldresultinfingersbeingpinchedbythemovinglens.
1.PresseitherSHIFT/HOMEPOSITIONbuttononthecabinetorLENSSHIFTBUTTONontheremotecontrol.
The [LENS SHIFT] screen will be displayed.
2. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstomovetheprojectedimage.
• Tosetbackthelenstothehomeposition
Press and hold the SHIFT/HOME POSITION button over 2 seconds. The lens mounted on the projector goes back to the home position. (roughly to the center position)
NOTE:• Ifthelensisshiftedtothemaximuminthediagonaldirection,thescreenperipheralareawillbedarkorshaded.• UseNP11FLatthehomeposition.
23
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
TIP: • Thediagrambelowshowsthelensshiftadjustmentrange(projectionformat:desk/front)oftheWUXGAtype(excludingthelensunitNP30ZL).
• RefertoPage167forthelensshiftadjustmentrangeoftheWXGAtype/XGAtypeandforceilinghanging/frontprojection.
100%V
50%V
10%V100%H30%H 30%H
10%H 10%H
Height of projected image
Width of projected image
NP803U/PA723U/PA653U
Descriptionofsymbols:Vindicatesvertical(heightoftheprojectedimage),Hindicateshorizontal(widthoftheprojectedimage).
FocusRecommendtoperformthefocusadjustmentafterleavingtheprojectorunderthestatetheTESTPATTERNhasbeenprojectedforover30minutes.Pleaserefertopage87intheUser’sManualabouttheTESTPATTERN.
Applicablelens:NP12ZL/NP13ZL/NP14ZLUsethefocusringtoobtainthebestfocus.
Focus ring
24
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Applicable lens: NP30ZLTheNP30ZLlensunitalignstheperipheralfocusaroundtheopticalaxis.
Peripheral focus ring
Focus Ring
Zoom Lever
1. Turn the focus ring left and right to align the focusaround the optical axis.
* The diagram shows an example when the lens shift is moved upward. The bottom of the screen is adjusted.
When the lens is in the center, the center of the screen is adjusted.
Focus Ring
Optical axis
2. Turntheperipheralfocusringtotheleftandrighttoalignthefocusofthescreenperipheralarea.
At this point, the focus around the optical axis adjusted in (1) remains unchanged.
Peripheral focus ring
25
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Applicable lens: NP11FLWiththeNP11FLlens,adjustthefocusandpicturedistortion.Preparations:PressandholdtheSHIFT/HOMEPOSITIONbuttononthecabinetlongerthan2secondsforshiftingbackthelensto the home position.
1.Turnthedistortionringtotheleftedge.
Distortion ring
2. Turnthefocusleverclockwiseandcounterclockwiseto adjust the focus at the center of the screen.
Focus lever
3.Usethedistortionringtocorrectthescreen’sdistortion.
(This also brings the screen peripheral area into focus.)
4. Use the focus lever to adjust the screen’s overall focus.
* If the focus at the center of the screen is off, turn the distortion ring a little counterclockwise. The focus at the center of the screen can now be adjusted with the focus lever.
26
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Applicable lens: NP40ZL/NP41ZL
1.PresstheFOCUSbuttononthecabinet.
The LENS FOCUS control screen will be displayed on.
* Press ◀▶ buttons to adjust focus. In another way, press and hold the CTL button and then press VOLUME/ FOCUS +/- button on the remote control
2.WhenthecursorisontheCENTERonon-screenmenu,press either ◀ or ▶buttontoalignfocusaroundtheoptical axis.
* The picture shows and example when the lens shift is moved upward. The focus for the lower part of the screen is aligned.
When the lens is at the center, the focus for the center of the screen is aligned. Optical axis
3. Press ▼ button to select thePERIPHERYon theon-screen menu, and then press either ◀ or ▶ button to alignthefocusofscreenperipheralarea.Duringthisoperation, the focus for around the optical axis will be maintained.
27
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Applicable lens: NP43ZL
1.PresstheFOCUSbuttononthecabinet.
Press ◀▶ buttons to adjust focus. In another way, press and hold the CTL button and then press VOLUME/FOCUS +/- button on the remote control.
* PERIPHERY LENS FOCUS is not available for this lens unit.
28
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Zoom
Applicablelens:NP12ZL/NP13ZL/NP14ZL/NP30ZLTurnthezoomringclockwiseandcounterclockwise.
Zoom ring
Applicablelensunits:NP40ZL/NP41ZL/NP43ZL1.PressZOOM/L-CALIB.button.
The ZOOM adjustment screen will be displayed on.
• ◀ or ▶ buttons on the cabinet or the remote control are available to adjust ZOOM while the ZOOM adjustment screen is displayed on.
• Ontheremotecontrol,whilepressingontheCTLbutton,presstheD-ZOOM/ZOOM(+)or(−)button.
The zoom is adjusted.
29
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Adjusting the Tilt Foot1.Turntheleftandrighttiltfoottoadjust.
The tilt foot lengthen and shorten when turned.
Turn one of the tilt foot to adjust the image so that it is level.
• Iftheprojectedimageisdistorted,see“3-6CorrectingHorizontaland Vertical Keystone Distortion [CORNERSTONE]” (→ page 38) and “[GEOMETRIC CORRECTION]” (→ page 103).
• Thetiltfootcanbelengthenedbyamaximumof20mm.
• Thetiltfootcanbeusedtotilttheprojectorbyamaximumof4°.
NOTE:• Donotlengthenthetiltfootanymorethan20mm/0.8".Doingsowillmakethetiltfoot’smountsectionunstableandcouldcausethetiltfoottocomeofftheprojector.
• Donotusethetiltfootforanypurposeotherthanadjustinginclinationoftheprojector installation angle.
Handlingthetiltfootimproperly,suchascarryingtheprojectorbygraspingthetilt foot or hooking it onto a wall using the tilt foot, could damage the projector.
Up
Tilt foot
Down
30
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❻ Optimizing Computer Signal AutomaticallyAdjusting the Image Using Auto AdjustWhenprojectingasignalfromthecomputervideoinputterminal,HDMI1inputterminal,HDMI2inputterminal,Dis-playPortinputterminal,HDBaseTIN/Ethernetport,adjustthepicturequalitywithasingletouchofthebuttoniftheedgesofthescreenarecutofforiftheprojectionqualityisbad.PresstheAUTOADJ.buttontooptimizeacomputerimageautomatically.Thisadjustmentmaybenecessarywhenyouconnectyourcomputerforthefirsttime.
[Poor picture] [Normal picture]
NOTE:Somesignalsmaytaketimetodisplayormaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.• IftheAutoAdjustoperationcannotoptimizethecomputersignal,trytoadjust[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],and[PHASE]
manually. (→ page 92, 93)
❼ Turning Up or Down VolumeSoundlevelfromtheAUDIOOUTterminalcanbeadjusted.
Important:• DonotturnupthevolumetothemaximumlevelontheexternalspeakersystemconnectedtotheAUDIOOUToftheprojector.Doingsomayproduceanunexpected,loudsoundatthetimeofturningonorofftheprojector,causingdamagetoyourhearing.Whenadjustingthevolumeontheexternalspeakersystem,setvolumelevelofthespeakersystemtolessthanhalfitsratingandadjust the volume on the projector to get appropriate sound level.
TIP:Whennomenusappear,the◀ and ▶ buttons on the projector cabinet work as a volume control.
NOTE:• Volumecontrolisnotavailablewiththe◀ or ▶ button when an image is enlarged byusingtheD-ZOOM(+)buttonorwhenthemenuisdisplayed.
Increase volume
Decrease volume
31
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❽ Turning off the ProjectorTo turn off the projector:
1. First, press the (POWER)buttonon theprojectorcabinetortheSTANDBYbuttonontheremotecontrol.
The [POWER OFF / ARE YOU SURE ? / CARBON SAV-INGS- SESSION 0.000[g-CO2]] message will appear.
2. Secondly, press the ENTERbutton or press the (POWER)ortheSTANDBYbuttonagain.
The lamp will go off and the power supply will be cut. If no operation is performed on the projector and no signal is input to the projector, the projector will be in standby state. The POWER indicator will light in orange (In the state, the standby mode is NORMAL and the PROFILE for the WIRED LAN is available.).
Power On
Steadily lights in blue
Sleep
Blinks in orange
CAUTION:PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.
NOTE:• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoff.• Youcannotturnoffthepowerfor60secondsimmediatelyafterturningitonanddisplayinganimage.• Donotunplugthepowercordfromtheprojectororfromthepoweroutletwhileanimageisbeingprojected.Doingsocoulddeterioratetheprojector’sACINterminalorthepowerplug’scontact.ToturnofftheACpowerwhileanimageisbeingprojected,usethepowerstrip’sswitch,thebreaker,etc.
• DonotdisconnecttheACpowersupplytotheprojectorwithin10secondsofmakingadjustmentorsettingchangesandclosingthemenu.Doingsocancauselossofadjustmentsandsettings.
32
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❾ After UsePreparation: Make sure that the projector is turned off.
1.Unplugthepowercord.Forpullingoutthepowerplug,pressandholdtheprotrudedsectionontheleftandrightsidesofthepart(B).
2.Disconnectanyothercables.
3. Mount the lens cap on the lens.
4.Beforemovingtheprojector,screwinthetiltfeetiftheyhavebeenlengthened.
33
❶ Turning off the Image and SoundTheprojectedvideoandtheoutputsoundfromthesoundoutputterminalwill disappear momentarily.
Press the BLANK button.Theprojectedvideowillbecutoff.
Press the MUTE button.Theaudiowillbecutoff.
PresstheAV-MUTEbutton.Theprojectedvideoandaudiowillbecutoff.
• Pressthebuttonsonemoretimeforthecancelledvideoandaudiotoappearagain.
WhenAV-MUTEandBLANKarecontinuedforsometime,theenergy-savingfunctionwillactivatetolowerthelamppower.
NOTE: • When theAV-MUTE andBLANKbuttons are pressed immediately after the
energy-saving function is activated, sometimes the brightness may not return to normal immediately.
TIP:• Thevideowilldisappearbutnotthemenudisplay.
3. Convenient Features
34
3. Convenient Features
❷ Shift the On-Screen Menu displaying position1. Press the MENU button.
The On-Screen Menu will be displayed on.
2. Move the cursor by the ▶buttontothe[SETUP]andthenpresstheENTERbutton. The cursor will move to the [MENU1].
3. Move the cursor by the ▶buttontothe[MENU2].
4. Move the cursor by the ▼buttontothe[MENUPOSITION]andthenpresstheENTER. The On-Screen Menu will go into the MENU POSITION setup screen.
5.MovethecursoreitherTO[HORIZONTALPOSITION]or[VERTICALPOSITION]bypressing▼ or ▲ button and then press ◀/▶buttontoshifttheOn-ScreenMenu.
For finishing the setting on the On-Screen Menu, press the MENU button on the remote control.
TIP: • Oncetheprojectorispoweredoff,theOn-ScreenMenudisplayingpositionwillberesettothedefaultfactorysettingposition.• Thisfunctiondoesnotinfluencetothedisplaypositionofinputterminalinformationandmessage.• ItenablestomovethemenubymouseclickwhenacommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisconnected.• Itenablestomovethemenupositionbythe▼▲◀ and ▶buttonsholdingtopresstheCTLbuttonontheremotecontrolor
mouse click.• WhiletheMENUPOSITIONoftheon-screenmenuisdisplayedonandthemenuismovedbythe▼▲◀ and ▶ buttons holding topresstheCTLbuttonontheremotecontrol,theindicationofadjustedvalueonthemenuwillnotbechanged.Inthiscase,closetheMENUPOSITIONmenuonceanddisplayitagainforindicatingtheadjustedvalueproperly.
35
3. Convenient Features
❸ Freezing a PicturePress theFREEZEbutton to freezeapicture.Pressagain to resumemotion.
NOTE: The image is frozen but the original video is still playing back.
❹ Enlarging a PictureYoucanenlargethepictureuptofourtimes.
NOTE: • Dependingonaninputsignal,themaximummagnificationmaybelessthan
four times, or the function may be restricted.
Todoso:
1.PresstheD-ZOOM(+)buttontomagnifythepicture.
2. Press the ▲▼◀▶ button. The area of the magnified image will be moved
3.PresstheD-ZOOM(−)button.
EachtimetheD-ZOOM(−)buttonispressed,theimageisreduced.
NOTE: • Theimagewillbeenlargedorreducedatthecenterofthescreen.• Displayingthemenuwillcancelthecurrentmagnification.
36
3. Convenient Features
❺ Changing Eco Mode/Checking Energy-Saving Effect Using Eco Mode [ECO MODE]Thisfeatureenablesyoutoselecttwobrightnessmodesofthelamp:OFFandONmodes.Thelamplifecanbeextendedbyturningonthe[ECOMODE].
[ECOMODE] Description
[OFF] Thisisthedefaultsetting(100%Brightness).
[ON] Lowlamppowerconsumption(approx.70%Brightness).
Toturnonthe[ECOMODE],dothefollowing:1.PresstheECObuttonontheremotecontroltodisplay[LIGHTMODE]screen.
2. Use the ▲ or ▼buttontoselect[ECOMODE].3. Use the ▲ or ▼buttontoselect[ON].4.PresstheENTERbutton.
To change from [ON] to [OFF], Go back to Step 2 and select [OFF]. Repeat Step 3.
NOTE: • The[ECOMODE]canbechangedbyusingthemenu. Select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION]→[LIGHTMODE]→[ECOMODE].• Thelampliferemainingandlamphoursusedcanbecheckedin[USAGETIME].Select[INFO.]→[USAGETIME].• [ECOMODE]isalwayssetto[OFF]for1minuteimmediatelyafterthelampisturnedon.Thelampconditionwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[ECOMODE]ischanged.
• Afteralapseof1minutefromwhentheprojectordisplaysablue,blackorlogoscreen,[ECOMODE]willautomaticallyswitchto[ON].
• Iftheprojectorisoverheatedin[OFF]mode,theremaybeacasewherethe[ECOMODE]automaticallychangesto[ON]modetoprotecttheprojector.Thisiscalled“ForcedECOMode”.WhentheprojectorisintheForcedEcoMode,thepicturebrightnessdecreasesslightlyandtheTEMP.indicatorlightsupinorange.AtthesametimetheThermometersymbol[ ]isdisplayedatthe bottom right of the screen.
Whentheprojectorcomesbacktonormaltemperature,theForcedEcoModeiscancelledandthe[ECOMODE]returnsto[OFF]mode.
37
3. Convenient Features
Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER]Thisfeaturewillshowenergy-savingeffectintermsofCO2emissionreduction(kg)whentheprojector’s[ECOMODE]issetto[OFF],or[ON].Thisfeatureiscalledas[CARBONMETER].
Therearetwomessages:[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]and[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION].The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]messageshowsthetotalamountofCO2emissionreductionfromthetimeofshipmentuptonow.Youcanchecktheinformationon[USAGETIME]from[INFO.]ofthemenu.(→page136)
The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messageshowstheamountofCO2 emission reduction between the time of changingtoECOMODEimmediatelyafterthetimeofpower-onandthetimeofpower-off.The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messagewillbedisplayedinthe[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?]messageatthetimeofpower-off.
TIP:• TheformulaasshownbelowisusedtocalculatetheamountofCO2 emission reduction. AmountofCO2emissionreduction=(PowerconsumptioninOFFforECOMODE−PowerconsumptioninONforECOMODE)×CO2conversionfactor.*WhentheimageisturnedoffwiththeAV-MUTEbuttontheamountofCO2 emmission reduction will also increase.* CalculationforamountofCO2emissionreductionisbasedonanOECDpublication“CO2EmissionsfromFuelCombustion,2008Edition”.
• The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]iscalculatedbasedonsavingsrecordedin15minutesintervals.• Thisformulawillnotapplytothepowerconsumptionwhichisnotaffectedbywhether[ECOMODE]isturnedonoroff.
38
3. Convenient Features
❻ Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion [CORNERSTONE]
Usethe[CORNERSTONE]featuretocorrectkeystone(trapezoidal)distortiontomakethetoporbottomandtheleftorrightsideofthescreenlongerorshortersothattheprojectedimageisrectangular.
1.Projectanimagesothatthescreenissmallerthantheareaoftheraster.
Projected image
The drawing shows the upper right corner.
2.Pickupanyoneofthecornersandalignthecorneroftheimagewithacornerofthescreen.
3.PresstheGeometric.buttoneitheronthecabinetortheremotecontrol.
Display the [GEOMETRIC CORRECTION] screen of the on-screen menu.
4.Movethecursoronto[MODE]by▼buttonandpresstheENTER. The mode selection screen will displayed on.
5. Select[CORNERSTONE]andpresstheENTER.
Go back to display the [GEOMETRIC CORRECTION] screen of the on-screen menu.
39
3. Convenient Features
6.Pressthe▼buttontoalignwiththe[CORNERSTONE]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.
The drawing shows the upper left icon ( ) is selected.
The screen will switch to the [CORNERSTONE] screen.
7. Use the ▲▼◀▶ button to select one icon (▲) which points in the direction you wish to move the projected imageframe.
8.PresstheENTERbutton.
9. Use the ▲▼◀▶buttontomovetheprojectedimageframeasshownontheexample.
10.PresstheENTERbutton.
11. Use the ▲▼◀▶ button to select another icon which points in the direction.
On the [CORNERSTONE] screen, select [EXIT] or press the EXIT button on the remote control.
40
3. Convenient Features
The confirmation screen is displayed.
12. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontohighlightthe[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton. This completes the [CORNERSTONE] correction.
• Select[CANCEL]andpresstheENTERbuttontoreturntothe[CORNERSTONE]screen.
Selecting[CANCEL]willreturntotheadjustmentscreenwithoutsavingchanges(Step3).Selecting[RESET]willreturntothefactorydefault.Selecting[UNDO]willexitwithoutsavingchanges.
NOTE: • Evenwhentheprojectoristurnedon,thelastusedcorrectionvaluesareapplied.• Carryouteitheroneofthefollowingactionstocleartheadjustmentvalueof[CORNERSTONE].• InStep11,select[RESET]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.• Inthestate[CORNERSTONE]hasbeenselectedfor[MODE]inthe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]:• PresstheGeometric.buttonfor2ormoreseconds.• Run[DISPLAY]→[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]→[RESET]intheon-screenmenu.
• UsingCORNERSTONEcorrectioncancausetheimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectronically.• AcommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisavailableforCORNERSTONEcorrection.
❼ Operation for the On-Screen Menu by a commercially available USB mouseOnceacommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisconnectedtothisprojector,itenablestoperformtheoperationfortheon-screenmenuandthegeometriccorrectioneasily.
NOTE:• NotguaranteetheperformanceofallUSBmouseavailableonthemarket.
Menu operation① Displaytheon-screenmenubyrightclick.
② Selectadesiredmenuandperformadjustmentbyleftclick.
Theadjustmentbarcanbecontrolbydraganddrop.
41
3. Convenient Features
③ Select[EXIT]displayedatthebottomofthemenubyleftclickforgoingbacktothepreviouslevel.Ifthecursorisonthemainmenuoption,itworksforclosingthemenu.(Itworksasthesameperfor-mancewiththe[EXIT]buttonontheremotecontrol.
Menu position control① Click thewheelbutton todisplay theon-screenmenu indication
frame.② Leftclickatthepositionontheprojectionscreenwhereyouwant
toshifttheon-screenmenu.Thenearestcorneroftheon-screenmenuindicationframewillshifttotheclickedposition.
③ Clickthewheelbuttontoclosethemenuindicationframe.
Geometric correctionTheUSBmousecanbeusedforCORNERSTONECORRECTION,HORIZONTALCORNER,VERTICALCORNERandWARP.Inthisclause,theCORNERSTONECORRECTIONbyanUSBmouseisexplainedasanexample.
① WhiletheadjustmentscreenoftheCORNERSTONECORRECTION is displayed, right click on the pro-jectionscreen.Theshapeofmousepointerwill bechangedandthecorrectionwillbecomeavailable.
42
3. Convenient Features
② Leftclickatthescreencorner.Theprojectionscreencornerwillmovetothemouseclickedposition.
③ Repeatthestep②forcorrectingalldistortion.Aftercompletionofdistortioncorrection,rightclickontheprojectionscreen.Theshapeofmousepointerwillbechangedtonormal.
④ Leftclick[EXIT]onthecorrectionscreentofinish.
43
3. Convenient Features
❽ Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]AkeywordcanbesetforyourprojectorusingtheMenutoavoidoperationbyanunauthorizeduser.Whenakeywordisset,turningontheprojectorwilldisplaytheKeywordinputscreen.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,thepro-jectorcannotprojectanimage.•The[SECURITY]settingcannotbecancelledbyusingthe[RESET]ofthemenu.
To enable the Security function:
1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Press the ▶buttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[MENU(1)].3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[CONTROL].4. Press the ▼buttonthreetimestoselect[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.
5. Press the ▼buttontoselect[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [SECURITY KEYWORD] screen will be displayed.
6. Typeinacombinationofthefour▲▼◀▶buttonsandpresstheENTERbutton.NOTE: A keyword must be 4 to 10 digits in length.
The [CONFIRM KEYWORD] screen will be displayed.
NOTE:Makeanoteofyourpasswordandstoreitinasafeplace.
44
3. Convenient Features
7. Typeinthesamecombinationof▲▼◀▶buttonsandpresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
8. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The SECURITY function has been enabled.
To turn on the projector when [SECURITY] is enabled:
1.PressthePOWERbutton.
The projector will be turned on and display a message to the effect that the projector is locked.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. TypeinthecorrectkeywordandpresstheENTERbutton.Theprojectorwilldisplayanimage.
NOTE: The security disable mode is maintained until the main power is turned off or unplugging the power cord.
45
3. Convenient Features
To disable the SECURITY function:
1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.
2.Select[SETUP]→[CONTROL]→[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.
3. Select[OFF]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The SECURITY KEYWORD screen will be displayed.
4. TypeinyourkeywordandpresstheENTERbutton.
When the correct keyword is entered, the SECURITY function will be disabled.
NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourkeyword,contactyourdealer.Yourdealerwillprovideyouwithyourkeywordinexchangeforyourrequestcode.YourrequestcodeisdisplayedintheKeywordConfirmationscreen.Inthisexample[NB52-YGK8-2VD6-K585-JNE6-EYA8]is a request code.
46
3. Convenient Features
❾ Projecting 3D videosThisprojectorcanbeusedtowatchvideosin3Dusingcommercially-availableactiveshutter-type3Deyewear.Inordertosynchronizethe3Dvideoandeyewear,acommercially-available3Demitterneedstobeconnectedtotheprojector(ontheprojectorside).The3Deyewearreceivesinformationfromthe3Demitterandperformsopeningandclosingontheleftandright.
CAUTION
Health precautionsBeforeuse,pleasemakesuretoreadanyhealthprecautionsthatmaybestatedintheoperatingmanualsenclosedwiththe3Deyewearand3Dvideosoftware(Blu-rayplayer,games,computeranimationfiles,etc.).Pleasetakenoteofthefollowinginordertoavoidadversehealtheffects.• Pleasedonotusethe3Deyewearforpurposesotherthantowatch3Dvideos.• Pleasekeepadistanceofatleast2mawayfromthescreenwhenwatchingvideos.Watchingavideotooclosetothescreenwillincreaseeyefatigue.
• Pleasedonotwatchvideoscontinuouslyforalongperiodoftime.Pleasetakea15minutes’breakaftereveryhourofwatching.
• Pleaseconsultadoctorbeforewatchingifyouoranyofyourfamilymembershaveahistoryofsufferingfromseizurescausedbylightsensitivity.
• Pleasestopwatchingimmediatelyandtakearestwhenyoufeelphysicallyunwellwhilewatching(vomiting,gid-diness,nausea,headaches,soreeyes,blurredvision,crampsanddumbnessinthelimbs,etc.).Pleaseconsulta doctor if the symptoms persist.
• Pleasewatcha3Dvideodirectlyinfrontofthescreen.Ifyouwatcha3Dvideoobliquelyfromthesides,thismayresultinphysicalandeyefatigue.
3D eyewear and 3D emitter preparationsPleaseuseanactiveshutter-type3DeyewearthatconformswiththeVESAstandard.Acommercially-availableRFtypemadebyXpandisrecommended.
3D eyewear ������������ Xpand X105-RF3D emitter �������������� Xpand AD025-RF-X1
Procedure to watch 3D videos using this projector1.Connectthevideodevicetotheprojector.
2. Switch on the power supply to the projector.
3.Runthe3Dvideosoftwareandprojectthevideousingtheprojector.
This has been automatically set up when shipped from the factory. When a 3D video cannot be projected, it may be because the 3D detection signals are not included or because they are not detectable by the projector.
Please manually select the format.
4. Selectthe3Dvideoformat.
(1) Press the “3D Set.” button on the remote control.
47
3. Convenient Features
The [3D SETTINGS] screen will be displayed.
(2) Press the ▼ button to align the cursor with the [FORMAT] and press the ENTER button.
The format screen will be displayed.
(3) Select the input signal format using the ▼ button and then press the ENTER button.
The 3D settings screen will disappear and the 3D video will be projected.
Press the MENU button and the on-screen menu will disappear.
The 3D caution message screen will be displayed when switching to a 3D video (default factory setting when shipped). Please read the “Health Precautions” on the previous page to watch videos in the correct manner. The screen will disappear after 60 seconds or when the ENTER button is pressed. (→ page 112)
5. Turnonthepowersupplyofthe3Deyewearandweartheeyeweartowatchthevideo.
A normal video will be shown when a 2D video is input.
To watch a 3D video in 2D, select [OFF(2D)] in the [FORMAT] screen mentioned above in (3).
NOTE:• Uponswitchingto3Dimage,thefollowingfunctionswillbecancelledanddisabled.[BLANKING],[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[EDGEBLENDING]([GEOMETRICCORRECTION]and[EDGEBLENDING]adjustmentvalueswillbe maintained.)
• Theoutputmaynotautomaticallyswitchtoa3Dvideodependingonthe3Dinputsignal.• ChecktheoperatingconditionsdescribedintheusermanualoftheBlu-rayplayer.• PleaseconnecttheDINterminalofthe3Demittertothe3DSYNCofthemainprojector.• The3Deyewearallowsvideostobeviewedin3Dbyreceivingsynchronizedopticalsignalsoutputfromthe3Demitter. Asaresult,the3Dimagequalitymaybeaffectedbyconditionssuchasthebrightnessofthesurroundings,screensize,viewing
distance, etc.• Whenplayinga3Dvideosoftwareonacomputer,the3DimagequalitymaybeaffectedifthecomputerCPUandgraphicschip
performance are low. Please check the required operating environment of the computer that is stated in the operating manual attachedtothe3Dvideosoftware.
• Dependingonthesignal,[FORMAT]and[L/RINVERT]maynotbeabletobeselected.Pleasechangethesignalinthatcase.
48
3. Convenient Features
When videos cannot be viewed in 3DPleasecheckthefollowingpointswhenvideoscannotbeviewedin3D.Pleasealsoreadtheoperatingmanualattachedtothe3Deyewear.
Possible reasons Solutions
The selected signal does not support 3D output� Please change the video signal input to one that supports 3D�
The format for the selected signal is turned to [OFF(2D)]� Please change the format in the on-screen menu to [AUTO] or a format that supports 3D�
A eyewear that is not supported by the projector is being used� Please purchase a commercially-available 3D eyewear or 3D emitter (recommended)� (→ page 46)
Please check the following points when a video cannot be viewed in 3D using a 3D eyewear that is supported by the projector�
The power supply of the 3D eyewear is turned off� Please turn on the power supply of the 3D eyewear�
The internal battery of the 3D eyewear is flat� Please charge or replace the battery�
The viewer is located too far away from the screen� Please get closer to the screen until the video can be seen in 3D�
Please turn the L/R INVERT in the on-screen menu to [OFF]�
Due to multiple 3D projectors working at the same time in the vi-cinity, the projectors may interfere with one another� Alternatively, there may be a bright light source near the screen�
Please maintain sufficient distance between the projectors�
Please keep the light source away from the screen�
Please turn the L/R INVERT in the on-screen menu to [OFF]�
There is an obstacle between the optical receiver of the 3D eyewear and the 3D emitter�
Please remove the obstacle�
The 3D format of the 3D video contents is not supported� Please check with the company selling the 3D video contents�
49
3. Convenient Features
❿ Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP BrowserOverviewUsingthewebbrowseronthecomputer,theHTTPserverscreenoftheprojectorcanbedisplayedtooperatetheprojector.
Possible operations on the HTTP server screen• Configurethesettingsrequiredforconnectingtheprojectortothenetwork(wiredLAN).(NETWORKSETTINGS)
• Configuretheemailnotification.(ALERTMAIL)
Whentheprojectorisconnectedtoanetwork(wiredLAN),notificationsonthelampreplacementperiodandvari-ous errors are sent to the email address that has been set up.
• Operatetheprojector.
Operationssuchpoweron/offoftheprojector,inputterminalswitchover,volumecontrol,picturecontrol,andlenscontrol etc. can be carried out.
• Configurethe[PJLinkPASSWORD],[AMXBEACON],and[CRESTRON]etc.
To view the HTTP server screen1.ConnecttheprojectortothecomputerwithaLANcablesoldcommercially.(→page152)
2. Select[SETUP]→[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIREDLAN]intheon-screenmenutoconfigurethenetworksettings.(→page126)
3. StartupthewebbrowseronyourcomputerandentertheaddressorURLintheinputfield.
Specify the address or URL as “http://<IP Address of Projector>/index.html”.
The basic HTTP server screen will be displayed.
TIP:ThefactorysettingIPaddressis[DHCPON].
NOTE: • Tousetheprojectorinanetwork,consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutnetworksettings.• Thedisplay’sorbutton’sresponsecanbesloweddownoroperationmaynotbeaccepteddependingthesettingsofyournetwork. Shouldthishappen,consultyournetworkadministrator.Theprojectormaynotrespondifitsbuttonsarerepeatedlypressedinrapidintervals.Shouldthishappen,waitamomentandrepeat.Ifyoustillcan’tgetanyresponse,turnoffandbackontheprojec-tor.
• IfthePROJECTORNETWORKSETTINGSscreendoesnotappearinthewebbrowser,presstheCtrl+F5keystorefreshyourwebbrowser (or clear the cache).
• Thisprojectoruses“JavaScript”and“Cookies”andthebrowsershouldbesettoacceptthesefunctions.Thesettingmethodwillvary depending on the version of browser. Please refer to the help files and the other information provided in your software.
Preparation before UseConnecttheprojectortoacommerciallyavailableLANcablebeforeengaginginbrowseroperations.(→page152)Operationwithabrowserthatusesaproxyservermaynotbepossibledependingonthetypeofproxyserverandthesettingmethod.Althoughthetypeofproxyserverwillbeafactor,itispossiblethatitemsthathaveactuallybeensetwillnotbedisplayeddependingontheeffectivenessofthecache,andthecontentssetfromthebrowsermaynotbereflectedinoperation.Itisrecommendedthataproxyservernotbeusedunlessitisunavoidable.
50
3. Convenient Features
Handling of the Address for Operation via a BrowserRegardingtheactualaddressthatisenteredfortheaddressorenteredtotheURLcolumnwhenoperationoftheprojectorisviaabrowser,thehostnamecanbeusedasitiswhenthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeenregisteredtothedomainnameserverbyanetworkadministrator,orthehostnamecor-respondingtotheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeensetinthe“HOSTS”fileofthecomputerbeingused.
Example1:Whenthehostnameoftheprojectorhasbeensetto“pj.nec.co.jp”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingbyspecifying http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.
Example2:WhentheIPaddressoftheprojectoris“192.168.73.1”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingbyspecifying http://192.168.73.1/index.html fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.
PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT
POWER:Thiscontrolsthepoweroftheprojector.ON ������������������������� Power is switched on�OFF ������������������������ Power is switched off�
VOLUME:Thiscontrolsthevolumeoftheprojector.▲ ��������������������������� Increases the volume adjustment value for the AUDIO OUT terminal�▼ ��������������������������� Decreases the volume adjustment value for the AUDIO OUT terminal�
AV-MUTE:Thiscontrolsthemutefunctionoftheprojector.PICTURE ON ���������� Mutes the video�PICTURE OFF ��������� Cancels the video muting�SOUND ON ������������ Mutes the audio from the AUDIO OUT terminal�SOUND OFF ����������� Cancels the audio muting from the AUDIO OUT terminal�ALL ON ������������������ Mutes each of the video, and audio functions for the AUDIO OUT terminal�ALL OFF ����������������� Cancels the muting of each of the video, and audio functions for the AUDIO OUT terminal�
51
3. Convenient Features
PICTURE:Controlsthevideoadjustmentoftheprojector.BRIGHTNESS ▲ ���� Increases the brightness adjustment value�BRIGHTNESS ▼ ���� Decreases the brightness adjustment value�CONTRAST ▲ �������� Increases the contrast adjustment value�CONTRAST ▼ �������� Decreases the contrast adjustment value�COLOR ▲ �������������� Increases the color adjustment value�COLOR ▼ �������������� Decreases the color adjustment value�HUE ▲ ������������������� Increases the hue adjustment value�HUE ▼ ������������������� Decreases the hue adjustment value�SHARPNESS ▲ ����� Increases the sharpness adjustment value�SHARPNESS ▼ ����� Decreases the sharpness adjustment value�• Thefunctionsthatcanbecontrolledwillvarydependingonthesignalbeinginputtotheprojector.(→page90,
91)
SOURCESELECT:Thisswitchestheinputconnectoroftheprojector.HDMI1 ������������������� Switches to the HDMI 1 IN connector�HDMI2 ������������������� Switches to the HDMI 2 IN connector�DisplayPort ������������ Switches to the DisplayPort�COMPUTER ����������� Switches to the COMPUTER IN connector�HDBaseT ���������������� Switch to image input sent from a transmission device that supports HDBaseT�
PROJECTORSTATUS:Thisdisplaystheconditionoftheprojector.LAMP LIFE REMAINING �����Displays the remaining life of the lamp as a percentage�LAMP HOURS USED �����������Displays how many hours the lamp has been used�FILTER HOURS USED ���������Displays how many hours the filter has been used�ERROR STATUS ������������������Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector�
LOGOFF:Loggingoffyourprojectorandreturningtotheauthenticationscreen(LOGONscreen).
52
3. Convenient Features
NETWORK SETTINGShttp://<IPAddressofProjector(Basic)>/index.html
•SETTINGS
WIRED LAN
INTERFACE Select[LAN]forconnectingLANbywirethrutheLANport.Select[HDBaseT]forconnectingLANbywirethrutheHDBaseTIN/Ethernetport.
SETTING SetforwiredLAN.
PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE2.
DISABLE TurnoffwiredLANconnection.ThePOWERindicatorthatisinformingtheSTANDBYstatewillstarttoblinkinorangelonginterval(→page180).
DHCPON AutomaticallyassignIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.
DHCPOFF SetIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorassignedbyyournetworkadministrator.
IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.
SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.
GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.
AUTODNSON DHCPserverwillautomaticallyassign IPaddressofDNSserverconnected to theprojector.
AUTODNSOFF SetyourIPaddressassignedbyyournetworkadministrator.
DNS SetyourIPaddressofDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.
APPLY ApplyyoursettingstowiredLAN.
53
3. Convenient Features
•NAME
PROJECTORNAME Enteranameforyourprojectorsothatyourcomputercanidentify theprojector.Aprojectornamemustbe16charactersorless.TIP:Projectornamewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
HOSTNAME Enterthehostnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Ahostnamemustbe16orless.
DOMAINNAME Enterthedomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Adomainnamemustbe60charactersorless.
SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector'smemory.
•ALERTMAIL
ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroflampreplacetimeorerrormessagesviae-mailwhenusingwiredLAN.PlacingacheckmarkwillturnontheAlertMailfeature.ClearingacheckmarkwillturnofftheAlertMailfeature.Sampleofamessagetobesentfromtheprojector:
Thelamphasreachedtheendofitsusablelife.Please replace the lamp.Usethespecifiedlampforsafetyandperformance.ProjectorName:xxxxLampHoursUsed:xxxx[H]
SENDER’SADDRESS Entersender’saddress.
SMTPSERVERNAME EntertheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector.
RECIPIENT’SADDRESS1,2,3
Enteryourrecipient’saddress.Uptothreeaddressescanbeentered.
TESTMAIL SendatestmailtocheckwhetheryoursettingsarecorrectornotNOTE:• Ifyouexecuteatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkifnetwork
settings are correct.• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkiftheRecipient’sAddressiscorrect.
SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector’smemory.
54
3. Convenient Features
•NETWORKSERVICE
PJLinkPASSWORD SetapasswordforPJLink*.Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,consultwithyourdealer.
HTTPPASSWORD SetapasswordforHTTPserver.Apasswordmustbe10charactersorless.Whenapasswordissetup,youwillbepromptedforyourusername(arbitrary)andpasswordduringLOGON.
AMXBEACON TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.TIP: WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrolsystemwillrecognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriateDeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.PlacingacheckmarkwillenabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.
ExtronXTP SetforconnectingthisprojectortotheExtronXTPtransmitter.ONwillenabletocon-nectwiththeXTPtransmitter.OFFwilldisabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.
SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector'smemory.
NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourpassword,contactyourdealer.Pleasecheck24digitsserialnumber(XXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX)displayed on the column for the password.
*WhatisPJLink?PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectorsofdifferentmanufacturers.ThisstandardprotocolisestablishedbyJapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssociation(JBMIA)in2005.TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
•CRESTRONROOMVIEWformanagingfromthecomputer.DISABLE DisablesROOMVIEW.
ENABLE EnablesROOMVIEW.
CRESTRON CONTROL for managing from the controller.DISABLE DisablesCRESTRONCONTROL.
ENABLE EnablesCRESTRONCONTROL.
IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofCRESTRONSERVER.
IPID SetyourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.
SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector'smemory.
TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCRESTRONROOMVIEW.Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com
•INFORMATION
WIREDLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwiredLANconnection.
UPDATE Reflectsettingswhentheyarechanged.
55
3. Convenient Features
LENS CONTROL
•CONTROL
FOCUS CENTER Alignthefocusaroundtheopticalaxis.
PERIPHERY Alignthefocusforthescreenperipheralarea.
ZOOM ◀/▶ Finelyadjustingthesizeofanimage.
SHIFT ▼▲◀▶ Adjusttheprojectedimage’sverticalandhorizontalposition.
HOME Returnthelensshiftpositiontothehomeposition.
CALIB. Correcttheadjustablezoom,focusandlesshiftrange.
•LENSMEMORY
STORE Storethecurrentadjustedvaluesinmemoryforeachinputsignal.
MOVE AppliestheadjustedvaluesofLENSSHIFT,motorizedZOOM,andmotorizedFO-CUStothecurrentsignal.
RESET Returntheadjustedvaluedtothelastcondition.
•REF.LENSMEMORY
PROFILE1/PROFILE2 Selectastored[PROFILE]number.
STORE StoreeachadjustedvalueofLENSSHIFT,motorizedZOOMandmotorizedFOCUSfortheselectedprofileasthecommonvaluesforeveryinputsignal.
MOVE Movethelenstothestoredvaluesfortheselectedprofile.
RESET Resetselected[REF.LENSMEMORY]fortheselected[PROFILE]tothedefaultfactorysettings.
56
3. Convenient Features
LOADBYSIGNAL
OFF Ifinputsignalisswitched,thelenswillnotshifttothelesshift,zoomandfocusval-uesfortheselected[PROFILE]number.
ON Ifinputsignalisswitched,thelenswillshifttothevaluesfortheselected[PROFILE]number.Ifnoadjustedvalueshavebeenstoredto[LENSMEMORY],thelenswillapply[REF.LENSMEMORY]adjustedvalues.Alternatively,ifnoadjustedvalueshavebeenstoredto[REF.LENSMEMORY],thelenswillstayunmoved.
FORCEDMUTE
OFF Notturnofftheimageduringlesshift.
ON Turnofftheimageduringlesshift.
NOTE:LENSMEMORYandREF.LENSMEMORYarefutureexpansionfunctions.
⓫ Storing Changes for Lens Shift, Zoom, and Focus [LENS MEMORY]ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvalueswhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,motorizedZOOMandmotorizedFO-CUSbuttonsoftheprojector.Adjustedvaluescanbeappliedtothesignalyouselected.Thiswilleliminatetheneedtoadjustlensshift,focus,andzoomatthetimeofsourceselection.Therearetwowaystosaveadjustedvaluesforlensshift,zoom,andfocus.
Functionname Description page
REF.LENSMEMORY Adjustedvaluescommontoallinputsignals.Atthetimeofinstallation,twokindsofadjustedvaluescanbestored.Ifnoadjustedvalueshavebeensavedto[LENSMEMORY],thelenswillapply[REF.LENSMEMORY]adjustedvalues.
→page117
LENSMEMORY Adjustedvaluesforeachinputsignal.Usetheadjustedvaluesforthesignalwithadifferentaspectratioorresolution.Theadjustedvaluescanbeappliedatthetimeofsourceselection.
→page99
NOTE:• The[LENSMEMORY]featureisnotavailableforthelensunit,NP11FL/NP12ZL/NP13ZL/NP14ZL/NP30ZL.• Besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION]afterreplacingthelens.
To store your adjusted values in [REF. LENS MEMORY]:1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.
57
3. Convenient Features
2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpresstheENTERbutton.
3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[INSTALLATION].
4. Press the ▼buttontoselect[REF.LENSMEMORY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [REF. LENS MEMORY] screen will be displayed.
5.Makesure[PROFILE]ishighlighted,thenpresstheENTERbutton.
The [PROFILE] selection screen appears.
58
3. Convenient Features
6.Pressthe▼/▲buttonstoselectthe[PROFILE]number,thenpresstheENTERbutton.
Return to the [REF. LENS MEMORY] settings screen.
7. Select[STORE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
8. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Select a [PROFILE] number and save the adjusted [LENS SHIFT], [ZOOM], and [FOCUS] values to it.
9. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be closed.
TIP:• Tostoreadjustedvaluesforeachinputsource,usetheLensMemoryfunction.(→ page 99)
59
3. Convenient Features
To call up your adjusted values from [REF. LENS MEMORY]:1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpresstheENTERbutton.
3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[INSTALLATION].4. Press the ▼buttontoselect[REF.LENSMEMORY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [REF. LENS MEMORY] screen will be displayed.
60
3. Convenient Features
5.Makesure[PROFILE]ishighlighted,thenpresstheENTERbutton.
The [PROFILE] selection screen appears.
6.Pressthe▼/▲buttonstoselectthe[PROFILE]number,thenpresstheENTERbutton.
Return to the [REF. LENS MEMORY] settings screen.
7. Select[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The lens will shift based on the adjusted values stored in the selected [PROFILE].
8. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The adjusted values will be applied to the current signal. .
9. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be closed.
61
3. Convenient Features
TIP:Tocallupthestoredvaluesfrom[LENSMEMORY]:1. Fromthemenu,select[ADJUST]→[LENSMEMORY]→[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton. During projection, if the adjusted values for an input signal have been saved, the lens will shift. If not, the lens will
shift according to the adjusted values stored in the selected [REF. LENS MEMORY] [PROFILE] number.
Toautomaticallyapplythestoredvaluesatthetimeofsourceselection:1. Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[REF.LENSMEMORY]→[LOADBYSIGNAL]andpresstheENTERbutton.
2. Press the ▼buttontoselectand[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton. This will move the lens automatically to the position at the time of source selection according to the adjusted
values.
NOTE:TheLensMemoryfunctionmaynotproduceacompletelyalignedimage(duetotolerancesinthelenses)usingtheadjustedvaluesstoredintheprojector.AftercallingupandapplyingthestoredvaluesfromtheLensMemoryfunction,finelyadjustthelensshift, zoom and focus to produce the best possible image.
62
4. Multi-Screen Projection❶ Things that can be done using multi-screen projectionThisprojectorcanbeusedsinglyorarrangedinmultipleunitsformulti-screenprojection.Wewillintroduceanexampleusingtwoprojectionscreenshere.
Case 1Usingasingleprojectortoprojecttwotypesofvideosatthesametime[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]
Case 2Usingfourprojectors(liquidcrystalpanel:WUXGA)toprojectvideowitharesolutionof3840×2160pixels[TILING]
Case 1. Using a single projector to project two types of videos [PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE]
Connection example and projection image
In the case of [PICTURE BY PICTURE] In the case of [PIP]
On-screen menu operationsDisplay[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]→[MODE]screenintheon-screenmenuandselect[PIP]or[PICTUREBYPICTURE].Fordetails,pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”.(→page66)
63
4. Multi-Screen Projection
Case 2. Using four projectors (liquid crystal panel: WUXGA) to project videos with a resolution of 3840 × 2160 pixels [TILING]
Connection example and projection image
On-screen menu operations1 Four similar videos are displayed when four projectors are projected.
Please request the retail store to adjust the projection position of each projector.
NOTE:• Whensettinguptheprojector,assignauniquecontrolIDtoeachprojector.• Setthe“Colorsetting”and“DeepColorsetting”onyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerto“Auto”.Refertotheowner’smanualac-companiedwithyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerformoreinformation.
• ConnectanHDMIoutputofyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputertothefirstprojectorandthenconnecttoHDBaseTIN/Ethernetportof the second and subsequent projectors.
• SelectinganotherinputsourceonthesecondandsubsequentprojectorswilldisabletheHDBaseTrepeaterfunction.
64
4. Multi-Screen Projection
2 Operatetheon-screenmenuusingthefourrespectiveprojectorstodividetheimageintofourportions.
Display [DISPLAY] → [MULTI SCREEN] → [PICTURE SETTING] Screen in the on-screen menu and select [TIL-ING].
(1) In the screen for setting the number of horizontal units, select [2 UNITS]. (number of units in the horizontal direction)
(2) In the screen for setting the number of vertical units, select [2 UNITS]. (number of units in the vertical direction)
(3) In the screen for setting the horizontal order, select [1st UNIT] or [2nd UNIT].
(look at the screens, the one on the left is the [1st UNIT] while the one on the right is the [2nd UNIT])
(4) In the screen for setting the vertical order, select the [1st UNIT] or the [2nd UNIT].
(look at the screens, the one at the top is the [1st UNIT] while the one at the bottom is the [2nd UNIT])
3 Adjust the lens shift of each projector to fine-tune the boundaries of the screen.
For further fine-tuning, adjust using [DISPLAY] → [EDGE BLENDING] in the on-screen menu for each projector.
For details, please refer to “4-3 Displaying a Picture Using [EDGE BLENDING]”.
(→ page 70)
65
4. Multi-Screen Projection
Things to note when installing projectors• Leavesufficientspaceontheleftandrightoftheprojectorsothattheintakeandexhaustventsoftheprojectorarenotobstructed.Whentheintakeandexhaustventsareobstructed,thetemperatureinsidetheprojectorwillriseand this may result in a malfunction.
• Pleasedonotpileuptheprojectorsdirectlyontopofoneanotherwheninstallingthem.Whentheprojectorsarepiledupontopofoneanother,theymayfalldown,resultingindamageandfailure.
• Installationexamplewhenusingtwoprojectors Thefollowinginstallationisrecommendedwhencombiningtheinstallationoftwoprojectorsformulti-screenprojec-tion.Pleaseleaveaspaceofatleast10cmbetweenthetheintake/exhaustventandthewall.[Installationexample]
Intake vent Exhaust vent
CabinetCabinetCabinet
Air dis-charge
Air intake
Front Right side Back
WARNING
Pleaserequesttheretailstoreforspecialinstallationservicessuchaswhenmountingtheprojectortotheceiling.Nevercarryouttheinstallationbyyourself.Theprojectormayfalldownandresultininjury.Pleaseuseasturdycabinetthatcanwithstandtheweightoftheprojectorfortheinstallation.Pleasedonotpileuptheprojectorsdirectlyon top of one another.
NOTE:• Fortherangeoftheprojectiondistance,pleaserefertotheAppendix“Throwdistanceandscreensize”.(→ page 162)
66
4. Multi-Screen Projection
❷ Displaying Two Pictures at the Same TimeTheprojectorhasafeaturethatallowsyoutoviewtwodifferentsignalssimultaneously.Youhavetwomodes:PIPmodeandPICTUREBYPICTUREmode.Theprojectionvideointhefirstscreendisplayisknownasthemaindisplaywhiletheprojectionvideothatiscalledoutsubsequentlyisknownasthesub-display.Selecttheprojectionfunctionunder[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]→[MODE]intheon-screenmenu(thedefaultfactorysettingwhenshippedisPIP).(→page101)• Asinglescreenisprojectedwhenpoweristurnedon.
Picture in Picture functionAsmallsub-displayisdisplayedinsidethemaindisplay.
Thesub-displaycanbesetupandadjustedasfollows.(→page101)• Selectwhethertodisplaythesub-displayatthetopright,topleft,bottomrightorbottomleftofthescreen(thesizeofthesub-displaycanbeselectedandthepositioncanbefine-tuned)
• Switchthemaindisplaywiththesub-display
Main Display
Sub-Display
Picture by picture functionDisplaythemaindisplayandsub-displaysidebyside.
Themaindisplayandsub-displaycanbesetupandadjustedasfollows.(→ page102)• Selectingthedisplayboundary(ratio)ofthemaindisplayandsub-display• Switchthemaindisplayandsub-display
Main Display Sub-Display
Input terminals that can be used for the main screen and sub-screen.Themainscreenandsub-screencanprovidethefollowinginputterminals.• Themaindisplayandsub-displaysupportcomputersignalsuptoWUXGA@60HzRB.
Sub-Display or additional displayHDMI1 HDMI2 DisplayPort COMPUTER HDBaseT
Main Display
HDMI1 No Yes Yes Yes YesHDMI2 Yes No Yes Yes YesDisplayPort Yes Yes No Yes YesCOMPUTER Yes Yes Yes No YesHDBaseT Yes Yes Yes Yes No
NOTE:• Somesignalsmaynotappeardependingontheresolution.
67
4. Multi-Screen Projection
Projecting two screens1.PresstheMENUbuttontodisplaytheon-screenmenuandselect[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].
This displays the [PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE] screen in the on-screen menu.
2. Select[SUBINPUT]usingthe▼/▲buttons,andpresstheENTERbutton. This displays the [SUB INPUT] screen.
3. Selecttheinputsignalusingthe▼/▲buttons,andpresstheENTERbutton.
* This screen belongs to a HDBaseT model.
The [PIP] (PICTURE IN PICTURE) or [PICTURE BY PICTURE] screen set up under [MODE] is projected. (→ page 101)
• Whenthesignalnameisdisplayedingrey,thismeansthatitcannotbeselected.
• ThesignalcanalsobeselectedbypressingthePIPbuttonorPBP/POPbuttonontheremotecontrol.
4. Press the MENU button.
The on-screen menu will disappear.
5.Whenreturningtosinglescreen,displaythe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTUE]screenonemoretimeandselect[OFF]inthe[SUBINPUT]screenoftheStep3.
TIP:• Duringdual-screenprojection,iftheselectedinputisnotsupportedbythesub-screen,thesub-screenwillappearasablack
screen.
68
4. Multi-Screen Projection
Switching the main display with the sub-display and vice versa1.PresstheMENUbuttontodisplaytheon-screenmenuandselect[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].
This displays the [PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE] screen in the on-screen menu.
2. Select[PICTURESWAP]usingthe▼/▲buttonsandthenpresstheENTERbutton. Display the screen for switching the display positions.
3. Select[ON]usingthe▼buttonandthenpresstheENTERbutton.
The video of the main display will switch with that of the sub-display.
When turned “OFF” When turned “ON”
Sub-display video
Main display video Sub-display video
Main display video
The signal output from the HDBaseT OUT/Ethernet terminal does not change even if the display positions are switched.
4. Press the menu button.
The on-screen menu will disappear.
69
4. Multi-Screen Projection
Restrictions
• Thefollowingoperationsareenabledonlyforthemaindisplay.
• Audio-visualadjustments
• Videomagnification/compressionusingthepartialD-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−buttons.
However,magnification/compressionisuptothepositionssetin[PICTUREBYPICTUREBORDER]only.
• TESTPATTERN
• Thefollowingoperationsareenabledforboththemaindisplayandsub-display.Theseoperationscannotbeap-plied individually.
• Momentarydeletionofvideo/audio
• Videopause
• [PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]cannotbeusedwhena3Dvideoisbeingdisplayed.
• Whenusingthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]function,[DYNAMICCONTRAST]cannotbeused.
• [PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]cannotbeusedwhenthesignalinputhasaresolutionof1920×1200ormore.
• TheHDBaseTOUT/Ethernetporthasarepeaterfunction.Theoutputresolutionislimitedbythemaximumresolu-tion of the connected monitor and projector.
70
4. Multi-Screen Projection
❸ Displaying a Picture Using [EDGE BLENDING]Ahighresolutionvideocanbeprojectedonanevenbiggerscreenbycombiningmultipleprojectorsontheleft,right,top and bottom.Thisprojectorisequippedwithan“EDGEBLENDINGFunction”thatmakestheedges(boundaries)oftheprojectionscreenindistinguishable.
NOTE:• Forprojectorthrowdistances,referto“Throwdistanceandscreensize”onpage162.• BeforeperformingtheEdgeBlendingfunction,placetheprojectorinthecorrectpositionsothattheimagebecomessquarein
the appropriate size, and then make optical adjustments (lens shift, focus, and zoom).• Adjustthebrightnessofeachprojectorusing[REF.LIGHT]under[LIGHTMODE].Inaddition,use[REF.WHITEBALANCE]toadjustthe[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS]and[UNIFORMITY].
Before explaining use of the Edge Blending functionThissectionexplainsthecasefor“Example:Placingtwoprojectorssidebyside”.Asshown,theprojectedimageontheleftisreferredtoas“ProjectorA”andtheprojectedimageontherightisreferredto“ProjectorB”.Unlessotherwisespecifiedhereinafter,the“projector”isusedtomeanbothAandB.
Example: Placing two projectors side by side
Edge Blending area
Projected area Projected area
Projector A Projector B
71
4. Multi-Screen Projection
Preparation:• Turnontheprojectoranddisplayasignal.• Whenperformingsettingsoradjustmentsusingoneremotecontrol,enablethe[CONTROLID]forassigningIDto
each projector so as not to activate the other projectors. (→page123)
Setting the overlap of projection screens
① Enable [EDGE BLENDING].1 Pressthe“EdgeBlend.”button.
The [EDGE BLENDING] screen will be displayed. Align the cursor with [MODE] and then press the ENTER but-ton. The mode screen will be displayed.
2 Select[MODE]→[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.
This enables the Edge Blending function. The following menu items are available:
[TOP], [BOTTOM], [LEFT], [RIGHT], [BLACK LEVEL], and [BLEND CURVE]
3 Select[RIGHT]forProjectorAand[LEFT]forProjectorB.
Press the ENTER button.
The following items are available:
[CONTROL], [MARKER], [RANGE], and [POSITION]
72
4. Multi-Screen Projection
4 Select[CONTROL]→[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Each [TOP], [BOTTOM], [LEFT], [RIGHT], and [BLACK LEVEL] has its own [CONTROL], [MARKER], [RANGE], and [POSITION].
• ForProjectorA,setthe[CONTROL]forthe[TOP],[LEFT]and[BOTTOM]to[OFF].SimilarlyforProjectorB,set the [CONTROL] for the [TOP], [RIGHT] and [BOTTOM] to [OFF].
② Adjust [RANGE] and [POSITION] to determine an area of overlapped edges of images projected from each projector.Turningon[MARKER]willdisplaymarkersinmagentaandgreen.Themagentamarkerisusedfor[RANGE]andgreenonefor[POSITION].
[RANGE](Determine an area of overlapped edges of images.)
[POSITION](Determine the position of overlapped edges of images.)Green marker
Turn on [RIGHT]
Magenta marker
Turn on [LEFT]
Magenta marker
* The2screensareseparatedinthediagramforexplanatorypurposes.
73
4. Multi-Screen Projection
1 Adjust[RANGE].
Use the ◀ or ▶ button to adjust the overlapped area.
TIP:• Adjusttooverlaponeprojector’markerwiththeotherprojector’smarker.
2 Adjust[POSITION].
Use the ◀ or ▶ button to align one edge with the other edge of overlapped images.
TIP:• Whendisplayingasignalwithadifferentresolution,performtheEdgeBlendingfunctionfromthestart.• Settingof[MARKER]willnotbesavedandreturnto[OFF]whentheprojectoristurnedoff.• Todisplayorhidethemarkerwhiletheprojectorisrunning,turnonoroff[MARKER]fromthemenu.
[BLEND CURVE]Adjustthebrightnessoftheoverlappedsectiononthescreens.Accordingtothenecessity,adjustthebrightnessoftheoverlappedsectiononthescreensbythe[BLENDCURVE]AND[BLACKLEVEL].• Setthe[MODE]to[ON]forselecting[BLENDCURVE]and[BLACKLEVEL].
Selectinganoptionforthe[BLENDCURVE]Bycontrollingthegraduationoftheoverlappedsectiononthescreens,itmakestheborderontheprojectedscreensinconspicuous.Selecttheoptimaloptionamongnine.1.OntheOn-ScreenMenu,movethecursorontothe[DISPLAY]→[EDGEBLENDING]→[BLENDCURVE]and
thenpresstheENTER.Theoptionsettingscreenforthe[BRENDCURVE]isdisplayedon.
74
4. Multi-Screen Projection
2. Selectoneoptionamongnineby▲ or ▼.
Black Level AdjustmentThisadjuststheblackleveloftheoverlappingareaandthenon-overlappingareaofthemulti-screen(EDGEBLENDING).Adjustthebrightnesslevelifyoufeelthedifferenceistoolarge.
NOTE: Thisfunctionisenabledonlywhen[MODE]isturnedon.Adjustableareavariesdependingonwhatcombinationof[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT]and[RIGHT]areturnedon.
Example: Adjusting the Black Level when placing two projectors side by side
Width of overlap
Adjust [CENTER] Adjust [CENTER]
Projector A’s image
Projector B’s image
Adjust [CENTER-RIGHT] Adjust [CENTER-LEFT]
1. Select[DISPLAY]→[EDGEBLENDING]→[BLACKLEVEL]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The screen will switch to the black level adjustment screen.
75
4. Multi-Screen Projection
2. Use the ▼ or ▲ button to select an item and use the ◀ or ▶toadjusttheblacklevel. Do this for the other projector if necessary.
9-segmented portions for Black Level adjustmentThecenterprojector
Thisfunctionadjuststhebrightnesslevelof9-segmentedportionsforthecenterprojectorand4-segmentedportionsfor the left bottom projector as shown below.
TOP-LEFT
BOTTOM-LEFT
CENTER-LEFT
TOP-RIGHT
CENTER-RIGHT
BOTTOM-RIGHT
TOP-CENTER
CENTER
CENTER
BOTTOM-CENTER
TOP-RIGHT
CENTER-RIGHT
TOP-CENTER
TIP:• Thenumberofblackleveldivisionscreens(maximumofninedivisions)changesdependingonthenumberofedgeblendingpositionsselected(top,bottom,right,left).Inaddition,whenthetop/bottomandleft/rightendsareselected,thecornerdivisionscreen appears.
• Theedgeblendingwidthisthewidthsetintherangeandthecornerisformedbytheintersectingareaofthetop/bottomendsorleft/rightends.
• The[BLACKLEVEL]canbeadjustedtomakeitbrighteronly.
76
5. Using On-Screen Menu❶ Using the Menus
NOTE: The on-screen menu may not be displayed correctly while interlaced motion video image is projected.
1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the menu.
NOTE: The commands such as ENTER,EXIT,▲▼, ◀▶ in the bottom show available buttons for your operation.
2. Press the ◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu.
3.PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettohighlightthetopitemorthefirsttab.
4. Use the ▲▼ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want to adjust or set.
Youcanusethe◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the tab you want.
5.PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythesubmenuwindow.
6.Adjustthelevelorturntheselecteditemonoroffbyusingthe▲▼◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet.
Changes are stored until adjusted again.
7.Repeatsteps2-6toadjustanadditionalitem,orpresstheEXITbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinet to quit the menu display.
NOTE:Whenamenuormessageisdisplayed,severallinesofinformationmaybelost,dependingonthesignalorsettings.
8. Press the MENU button to close the menu.
Toreturntothepreviousmenu,presstheEXITbutton.
77
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❷ Menu ElementsSlide bar
Solid triangle
Menu mode
Tab
Radio button
High Altitude symbol
ECO mode symbol
Menu windows or dialog boxes typically have the following elements:
Highlight ����������������������������� Indicates the selected menu or item� Solid triangle ���������������������� Indicates further choices are available� A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active� Tab �������������������������������������� Indicates a group of features in a dialog box� Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front�Radio button �����������������������Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box�Source �������������������������������� Indicates the currently selected source�Menu mode ������������������������ Indicates the current menu mode: BASIC or ADVANCED�Off Timer remaining time ���� Indicates the remaining countdown time when the [OFF TIMER] is preset�Slide bar ����������������������������� Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment�ECO mode symbol �������������� Indicates [ECO MODE] is set�Key Lock symbol ���������������� Indicates the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is enabled�Thermometer symbol ��������� Indicates the [ECO MODE] is forcibly set to [ON] mode because the internal temperature is too high�High Altitude symbol ���������� Indicates the [FAN MODE] is set to [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode�
Source
Available buttons
Thermometer symbol
Key Lock symbol
Off Timer remaining time
Highlight
78
5. Using On-Screen Menu
* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.*1 The[GAMMACORRECTION]itemisavailablewhenanitemotherthan[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].*2 The[SCREENSIZE]itemisavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].*3 When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],the[COLORTEMPERATURE]isnotavailable.*4 The[INPUTRESOLUTION]itemcanbeselectedforCOMPUTERinput.*5 The[HDRMODE]itemisavailableexclusivelyfor4Ksignal.
•Basicmenuitemsareindicatedbyshadedarea.❸ List of Menu ItemsSomemenuitemsarenotavailabledependingontheinputsource.Menu Item Default Options
INPUT
1:HDMI1 *2:HDMI2 *3:DisplayPort *4:COMPUTER *5:HDBaseTENTRY LISTTEST PATTERN
ADJUST
PICTURE
MODE STANDARD STANDARD, PROFESSIONAL
PRESET * HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE, GRAPHIC, sRGB, DICOM SIM�
DETAIL SETTINGS
GENERAL
REFERENCE * AUTO, HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE, GRAPHIC, sRGB, DICOM SIM�
GAMMA CORRECTION*1 DYNAMIC, NATURAL, BLACK DETAILSCREEN SIZE*2 * LARGE, MEDIUM, SMALLCOLOR TEMPERATURE*3 *DYNAMIC CONTRAST * OFF, MOTION IMAGE, STILL IMAGELIGHT ADJUST *
WHITE BALANCECONTRAST R 0CONTRAST G 0CONTRAST B 0BRIGHTNESS R 0BRIGHTNESS G 0BRIGHTNESS B 0
COLOR CORRECTIONRED 0GREEN 0BLUE 0YELLOW 0MAGENTA 0CYAN 0
CONTRAST 50BRIGHTNESS 50SHARPNESS 10COLOR 50HUE 0VOLUMERESET
IMAGE OPTIONS
CLOCK *PHASE *HORIZONTAL *VERTICAL *BLANKING * TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, RIGHTOVERSCAN AUTO, 0[%], 5[%], 10[%]
ASPECT RATIOAUTO (COMPUTER) AUTO, NORMAL, 4:3, 5:4, 16:9, 15:9, 16:10, FULL,
NATIVE
AUTO (HDTV/SDTV) AUTO, NORMAL, 4:3, LETTERBOX, WIDE SCREEN, ZOOM, FULL
INPUT RESOLUTION*4 * –
VIDEO
NOISE REDUCTIONRANDOM NR * OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGHMOSQUITO NR OFF OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGHBLOCK NR OFF OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH
DEINTERLACE NORMAL NORMAL, MOVIE, STILLCONTRAST ENHANCEMENT
MODE AUTO OFF, AUTO, NORMALGAIN
SIGNAL TYPE AUTO AUTO, RGB, REC601, REC709, REC2020VIDEO LEVEL AUTO AUTO, NORMAL, ENHANCED, SUPER WHITEHDR MODE*5 AUTO AUTO, OFF, ON
79
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Item Default Options
ADJUST
3D SETTINGS
STEREO VIEWER SINGLE SINGLE, DUAL LEFT, DUAL RIGHTSTEREO FILTER SINGLE SINGLE, DUAL LEFT, DUAL RIGHT
FORMAT AUTOAUTO, OFF(2D), FRAME PACKING, SIDE BY SIDE(HALF), SIDE BY SIDE(FULL), TOP AND BOTTOM, FRAME ALTERNATIVE, LINE ALTERNATIVE
L/R INVERT OFF OFF, ON
LENS MEMORY
STOREMOVERESET
DISPLAY
PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE
SUB INPUT OFF OFF, HDMI1, HDMI2, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseTMODE PIP PIP, PICTURE BY PICTUREPICTURE SWAP OFF OFF, ON
PIP SETTING
START POSITION TOP-LEFT TOP-LEFT, TOP-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM-RIGHTHORIZONTAL POSITIONVERTICAL POSITIONSIZE MEDIUM LARGE, MEDIUM, SMALL
BORDER
GEOMETRIC CORRECTION
MODE OFF OFF, KEYSTONE, CORNERSTONE, HORIZONTAL CORNER, VERTICAL CORNER, WARP, PC TOOL
KEYSTONE
HORIZONTALVERTICALTILTTHROW RATIO
CORNERSTONE TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT
HORIZONTAL CORNER TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT
VERTICAL CORNER TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT
WARP TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT
PC TOOL OFF OFF, 1, 2, 3RESET
EDGE BLENDING
MODE OFF OFF, ON
TOP
CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER OFF OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION
BOTTOM
CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER OFF OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION
LEFT
CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER OFF OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION
RIGHT
CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER OFF OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION
BLACK LEVEL
TOP-LEFTTOP-CENTERTOP-RIGHTCENTER-LEFTCENTERCENTER-RIGHTBOTTOM-LEFTBOTTOM-CENTERBOTTOM-RIGHT
BLEND CURVE 5 OFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
80
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Item Default Options
DISPLAY MULTI SCREEN
WHITE BALANCE
MODE OFF OFF, ONCONTRAST WCONTRAST RCONTRAST GCONTRAST BBRIGHTNESS WBRIGHTNESS RBRIGHTNESS GBRIGHTNESS B
PICTURE SETTING
MODE OFF OFF, ZOOM, TILING
ZOOM
HORIZONTAL ZOOMVERTICAL ZOOMHORIZONTAL POSITIONVERTICAL POSITION
TILING
WIDTH 1 UNIT, 2 UNITS, 3 UNITS, 4 UNITSHEIGHT 1 UNIT, 2 UNITS, 3 UNITS, 4 UNITSHORIZONTAL POSITION 1st UNIT, 2nd UNIT, 3rd UNIT, 4th UNIT
VERTICAL POSITION 1st UNIT, 2nd UNIT, 3rd UNIT, 4th UNIT
SETUP
MENU(1)
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, FRANÇAIS, ITALIANO, ESPAÑOL, SVENSKA, 日本語DANSK, PORTUGUÊS, ČEŠTINA, MAGYAR, POLSKI, NEDERLANDS, SUOMINORSK, TÜRKÇE, РУССКИЙ, , Ελληνικά, 简体中文, 한국어ROMÂNĂ, HRVATSKA, БЪЛГАРСКИ, INDONESIA, हिन्दी, ไทย,
, 繁體中文, Tiếng ViệtCOLOR SELECT COLOR COLOR, MONOCHROMEINPUT DISPLAY ON OFF, ONMESSAGE DISPLAY ON OFF, ONID DISPLAY ON OFF, ONECO MESSAGE OFF OFF, ON3D CAUTION MESSAGE ON OFF, ON
DISPLAY TIME AUTO 45 SEC MANUAL, AUTO 5 SEC, AUTO 15 SEC, AUTO 45 SEC
FILTER MESSAGE OFF OFF, 100[H], 500[H], 2000[H], 4000[H], 5000[H], 6000[H], 7000[H], 10000[H]
MENU(2)
MENU ANGLE 0°, 90°, 270°
MENU POSITIONHORIZONTAL POSITIONVERTICAL POSITIONRESET
INSTALLATION
ORIENTATION AUTO AUTO, DESKTOP FRONT, CEILING REAR, DESKTOP REAR, CEILING FRONT
SCREENSCREEN TYPE FREE FREE, 4:3 SCREEN, 16:9 SCREEN, 16:10 SCREENPOSITION
WALL COLOR OFFOFF, WHITEBOARD, BLACKBOARD, BLACKBOARD (GRAY), LIGHT YELLOW, LIGHT GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, SKY BLUE, LIGHT ROSE, PINK
FAN MODE AUTO AUTO, NORMAL, HIGH, HIGH ALTITUDE
LIGHT MODEECO MODE OFF OFF, ONREF� LIGHT ADJUST
REF� WHITE BALANCE
CONTRAST RCONTRAST GCONTRAST BBRIGHTNESS RBRIGHTNESS GBRIGHTNESS BUNIFORMITY RUNIFORMITY B
STATIC CONVERGENCE
HORIZONTAL RHORIZONTAL GHORIZONTAL BVERTICAL RVERTICAL GVERTICAL B
REF� LENS MEMORY
PROFILE 1 1, 2STOREMOVERESETLOAD BY SIGNAL OFF OFF, ONFORCED MUTE OFF OFF, ON
LENS CALIBRATION
81
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Item Default Options
SETUP CONTROL
TOOLS
ADMINISTRA-TOR MODE
MENU MODE ADVANCED ADVANCED, BASICNOT SAVE SETTING VALUES OFF OFF, ONNEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD
PROGRAM TIMER
ENABLE OFF OFF, ON
SETTINGS
EDIT
ACTIVE OFF, ON
DAY SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT, MON-FRI, MON-SAT, EVERY DAY
TIMEFUNCTION POWER, INPUT, ECO MODEADVANCED SETTINGSPOWER OFF, ONSOURCE HDMI1, HDMI2, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseTECO MODE OFF, ON
REPEAT OFF, ONDELETEUPDOWNBACK
DATE AND TIME SETTINGS
TIME ZONE SETTIMGS
UTC
-12:00, -11:30, -11:00, -10:30, -10:00, -09:30, -09:00, -08:30, -08:00, -07:30, -07:00, -06:30, -06:00, -05:30, -05:00, -04:30, -04:00, -03:30, -03:00, -02:30, -02:00, -01:30, -01:00, -00:30, 00:00, +00:30, +01:00, +01:30, +02:00, +02:30, +03:00, +03:30, +04:00, +04;30, +05:00, +05:30, +06:00, +06:30, +07:00, +07:30, +08:00, +08:30, +09:00, +09:30, +10:00, +10:30, +11:00, +11:30, +12:00, +12:30, +13:00
DATE AND TIME SETTINGS
DATE MM/DD/YYYYTIME HH:MMINTERNET TIME SERVER OFF, ON
IP ADDRESSUPDATE
SUMMER TIME SETTINGS
ENABLE OFF, ONMON(START) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
DAY(START)FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK, FOURTH WEEK, LAST WEEKSUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT
TIME(START)MON(EXIT) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
DAY(EXIT)FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK, FOURTH WEEK, LAST WEEKSUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT
TIME(EXIT)TIME DIFFERENCE +01:00, +00:30, -00:30, -01:00
MOUSEBUTTON RIGHT HAND RIGHT HAND, LEFT HANDSENSITIVITY MEDIUM FAST, MEDIUM, SLOW
CONTROL PANEL LOCK OFF OFF, ONSECURITY OFF OFF, ONCOMMUNICATION SPEED 38400bps 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 115200bps
CONTROL IDCONTROL ID NUMBER 1 1–254CONTROL ID OFF OFF, ON, AUTO
REMOTE SENSOR FRONT/BACK FRONT/BACK, FRONT, BACK, HDBase-T
82
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Item Default Options
SETUP
NETWORK SETTINGS
WIRED LAN
INTERFACE LAN, HDBaseTPROFILES DISABLE, PROFILE 1, PROFILE 2DHCP OFF, ONIP ADDRESSSUBNET MASKGATEWAYAUTO DNS OFF, ONDNS CONFIGURATIONRECONNECT
PROJECTOR NAME PROJECTOR NAME PJ-********
DOMAINHOST NAME pj-********DOMAIN NAME
ALERT MAIL
ALERT MAIL OFF, ONHOST NAMEDOMAIN NAMESENDER'S ADDRESSSMTP SERVER NAMERECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 1RECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 2RECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 3TEST MAIL
NETWORK SERVICE
HTTP SERVER
NEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD
PJLinkNEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD
AMX BEACON OFF, ONCREST-RON
ROOMVIEWCRESTRON CONTROL CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS, IP ID
Extron XTP OFF, ON
SOURCE OPTIONS
AUTO ADJUST NORMAL OFF, NORMAL, FINE
AUDIO SELECT
HDMI1 HDMI1 HDMI1, COMPUTERHDMI2 HDMI2 HDMI2, COMPUTERDisplayPort DisplayPort DisplayPort, COMPUTERHDBaseT HDBaseT HDBaseT, COMPUTER
DEFAULT INPUT SELECT LAST LAST, AUTO, HDMI1, HDMI2, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseTSEAMLESS SWITCHING OFF OFF, ONBACKGROUND BLUE BLUE, BLACK, LOGOHDBaseT OUT SELECT AUTO AUTO, HDMI1, HDMI2, DisplayPort, HDBaseT
EDIT VERSIONHDMI1 MODE1 MODE1, MODE2HDMI2 MODE1 MODE1, MODE2
HDCP VERSIONHDMI1 HDCP2�2 HDCP2�2, HDCP1�4HDMI2 HDCP2�2 HDCP2�2, HDCP1�4HDBaseT HDCP1�4 HDCP2�2, HDCP1�4
POWER OPTIONS
STANDBY MODE NORMAL NORMAL, SLEEPDIRECT POWER ON OFF OFF, ONAUTO POWER ON SELECT OFF OFF, HDMI1, HDMI2, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseTAUTO POWER OFF 0:15 OFF, 0:05, 0:10, 0:15, 0:20, 0:30, 1:00OFF TIMER OFF OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00
RESET
CURRENT SIGNALALL DATAALL DATA (INCLUDING ENTRY LIST)CLEAR LAMP HOURSCLEAR FILTER HOURS
83
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Item Default Options
INFO�
USAGE TIME
LAMP LIFE REMAININGLAMP HOURS USEDFILTER HOURS USEDTOTAL CARBON SAVINGS
SOURCE(1)
INPUT TERMINALRESOLUTIONHORIZONTAL FREQUENCYVERTICAL FREQUENCYSYNC TYPESYNC POLARITYSCAN TYPESOURCE NAMEENTRY NO�
SOURCE(2)
SIGNAL TYPEBIT DEPTHVIDEO LEVELSAMPLING FREQUENCY3D FORMAT
SOURCE(3)
INPUT TERMINALRESOLUTIONHORIZONTAL FREQUENCYVERTICAL FREQUENCYSYNC POLARITYSYNC TYPESOURCE NAMEENTRY NO�
SOURCE(4)
SIGNAL TYPEBIT DEPTHVIDEO LEVELSAMPLING FREQUENCY3D FORMAT
WIRED LAN
IP ADDRESSSUBNET MASKGATEWAYMAC ADDRESS
VERSIONFIRMWAREDATAFIRMWARE(2)
OTHERS
DATE TIMEPROJECTOR NAMEMODEL NO�SERIAL NUMBERCONTROL ID*5
DETECTED PROJECTORSLENS ID
CONDITIONS
INTAKE TEMPERATUREEXHAUST TEMPERATUREATMOSPHERIC PRESSUREINSTALLATION POSITIONX-AXISY-AXISZ-AXIS
HDBaseT
SIGNAL QUALITYOPERATION MODELINK STATUSHDMI STATUS
*5 [CONTROLID]willbedisplayedwhen[CONTROLID]hasbeensetup.
84
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❹ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INPUT]
1:HDMI1ThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheHDMI1INterminal.
2:HDMI2ThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheHDMI2INterminal.
3:DisplayPortThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheDisplayPortinputterminal.
4:COMPUTERThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtothecomputervideoinputterminal.(ThisprojectstheanalogRGBsignalorcomponentsignal.)
5:HDBaseTProjectingtheHDBaseTsignal.
ENTRY LISTDisplaysalistofsignals.Seethefollowingpages.
TEST PATTERNClosesthemenuandswitchestothetestpatternscreen.
85
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Using the Entry ListWhenanysourceadjustmentsaremade,theadjustmentsareautomaticallyregisteredintheEntryList.The(adjust-mentvaluesof)registeredsignalscanbeloadedfromtheEntryListwhenevernecessary.However,onlyupto100patternscanberegisteredintheEntryList.When100patternshavebeenregisteredintheEntryList,anerrormessageisthendisplayedandnoadditionalpatternscanberegistered.Youshouldthusdelete(adjustmentvaluesof)signalsthatarenolongerneeded.
Displaying the Entry list1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[INPUT]. The INPUT list will be displayed.
* This screen belongs to a HDBaseT model.
3. Use the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼toselect[ENTRYLIST]andpresstheENTERbutton. The ENTRY LIST windows will be displayed.
If the ENTRY LIST window is not displayed, switch the menu to [ADVANCED].
To switch the menu between [ADVANCED] and [BASIC], select [SETUP] → [CONTROL] → [TOOLS] → [AD-MINISTRATOR MODE] → [MENU MODE]. (→ page 113)
86
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Entering the currently projected signal into the Entry List [ (STORE)]
1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select any number.
2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[ (STORE)]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Calling up a signal from the Entry List [ (LOAD)]Press the ▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignalandpresstheENTERbutton.
Editing a signal from the Entry List [ (EDIT)]
1. Press the ▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignalyouwishtoedit.2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (EDIT)]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The Edit window will be displayed.
SOURCENAME Enterasignalname.Upto18alphanumericcharacterscanbeused.INPUT The input terminal can be changed. Switching betweenHDMI/DisplayPort/Computer/
HDBaseTispossible.LOCK Setsothattheselectedsignalcannotbedeletedwhen[ (ALLDELETE)]isexecuted.
ThechangesmadeafterLOCKexecutioncannotbesaved.SKIP Setsothattheselectedsignalwillbeskippedduringautosearch.
3. Settheaboveitemsandselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
NOTE: The input terminal cannot be changed to the currently projected signal.
87
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Cutting a signal from the Entry List [ (CUT)]
1. Press the ▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignalyouwishtodelete.2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (CUT)]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The signal will be deleted from the Entry List and the deleted signal will be displayed on the clipboard at the bot-tom of the Entry List.
NOTE:• Thecurrentlyprojectedsignalcannotbedeleted.• Whenthelockedsignalisselected,itwillbedisplayedingraywhichindicatesitisnotavailable.
TIP:• DataontheclipboardcanbepassedontotheEntryList.• DataontheclipboardwillnotbelostaftertheEntryListisclosed.
Copying and pasting a signal from the Entry List [ (COPY)]/[ (PASTE)]
1. Press the ▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignalyouwishtocopy.2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (COPY)]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The copied signal will be displayed on the clipboard at the bottom of the Entry List.
3. Press the ◀ or ▶ button to move to the list.
4. Press the ▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignal.5. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (PASTE)]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Data on the clipboard will be pasted to the signal.
Deleting all the signals from the Entry List [ (ALLDELTE)]
1. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (ALLDELETE)]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
NOTE: The locked signal cannot be deleted.
Using Test Pattern [TEST PATTERN] Displaysthetestpatternforadjustingdistortiononthescreenandthefocusatthetimeoftheprojectorsetup.Oncethe[TESTPATTERN]ontheonscreenmenuisselected,thepatternforadjustmentwillbedisplayedon.Ifyoufinddistortiononthepattern,adjusttheprojectorinstallationangleorcorrectdistortionbypressingtheGeometric.buttonontheremote.Ifthefocusadjustmentisrequired,presstheFOCUSbuttonontheremotecontrolfordisplayingtheFOCUSadjustmentscreenandthenadjustFOCUSby◀ or ▶button.RecommendtoperformthefocusadjustmentafterleavingtheprojectorunderthestatetheTESTPATTERNhasbeenprojectedforover30minutes.PressEXITbutton to close the test pattern and return to the menu.
88
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❺ Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST][PICTURE]
[MODE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutodeterminehowtosavesettingsfor[DETAILSETTINGS]of[PRESET]foreachinput.
STANDARD ������������ Saves settings for each item of [PRESET] (Preset 1 through 7)PROFESSIONAL ����� Saves all the settings of [PICTURE] for each input�
NOTE: • When[TESTPATTERN]isdisplayed,[MODE]cannotbeselected.
[PRESET]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectoptimizedsettingsforyourprojectedimage.Youcanadjustneutraltintforyellow,cyanormagenta.Therearesevenfactorypresetsoptimizedforvarioustypesofimages.Youcanalsouse[DETAILSETTINGS]tosetuseradjustablesettingstocustomizeeachgammaorcolor.Yoursettingscanbestoredin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].
AUTO ��������������������� Automatically distinguish the optimal setting for the input signal�HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�sRGB ��������������������� Standard color valuesDICOM SIM� ���������� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�
NOTE: • The[DICOMSIM.]optionisfortraining/referenceonlyandshouldnotbeusedforactualdiagnosis.• DICOMstandsforDigitalImagingandCommunicationsinMedicine.ItisastandarddevelopedbytheAmericanCollegeofRadiol-ogy(ACR)andtheNationalElectricalManufacturersAssociation(NEMA).
The standard specifies how digital image data can be moved from system to system.
89
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[DETAIL SETTINGS]
[GENERAL]StoringYourCustomizedSettings[REFERENCE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutostoreyourcustomizedsettingsin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].First,selectabasepresetmodefrom[REFERENCE],thenset[GAMMACORRECTION]and[COLORTEMPERA-TURE].
HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�sRGB ��������������������� Standard color values�DICOM SIM� ���������� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�
Selecting Gamma Correction Mode [GAMMA CORRECTION]Eachmodeisrecommendedfor:
DYNAMIC �������������� Creates a high-contrast picture�NATURAL ��������������� Natural reproduction of the picture�BLACK DETAIL ������� Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture�
NOTE:Thisfunctionisnotavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].
SelectingScreenSizeforDICOMSIM[SCREENSIZE]Thisfunctionwillperformgammacorrectionappropriateforthescreensize.
LARGE ������������������� For screen size of 150"MEDIUM ���������������� For screen size of 100"SMALL ������������������� For screen size of 50"
NOTE:Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].
90
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Adjusting Color Temperature [COLOR TEMPERATURE]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthecolortemperatureofyourchoice.Avaluebetween5000Kand10500Kcanbesetin100Kunits.
NOTE:When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],thisfunctionisnotavailable.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast [DYNAMIC CONTRAST]Whenset,themostoptimalcontrastratioisadjustedaccordingtothevideo.
OFF ������������������������ Dynamic contrast is disabled�MOTION IMAGE ����� Most optimal settings for moving images�STILL IMAGE ��������� Most optimal settings for static images� Rapidly follows any changes in the video�
NOTE:• Dependingontheconditions,projectorsettingssuchas[DYNAMICCONTRAST]maynotbeabletobeselected.
AdjustingBrightness[LIGHTADJUST]Theadjustmentiseffectivewhen[PROFESSIONAL]isselectedfor[MODE].
Adjusting White Balance [WHITE BALANCE]Thisallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalance.Contrastforeachcolor(RGB)toadjustthewhitelevelofthescreen;Brightnessforeachcolor(RGB)isusedtoadjusttheblacklevelofthescreen.
[COLOR CORRECTION]Correctsthecolorforallsignals.Adjuststhetoneforthecolorsred,green,blue,yellow,magentaandcyan.
RED HUE +Direction Magentadirection−Direction Yellowdirection
SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak
GREEN HUE +Direction Yellowdirection−Direction Cyandirection
SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak
BLUE HUE +Direction Cyandirection−Direction Magentadirection
SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak
YELLOW HUE +Direction Reddirection−Direction Greendirection
SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak
MAGENTA HUE +Direction Bluedirection−Direction Reddirection
SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak
CYAN HUE +Direction Greendirection−Direction Bluedirection
SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak
[CONTRAST]Adjuststheintensityoftheimageaccordingtotheincomingsignal.
[BRIGHTNESS]Adjuststhebrightnesslevelorthebackrasterintensity.
91
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[SHARPNESS]Controlsthedetailoftheimage.
[COLOR]Increasesordecreasesthecolorsaturationlevel.
[HUE]Variesthecolorlevelfrom+/−greento+/−blue.Theredlevelisusedasreference.
NOTE:• When[TESTPATTERN]isdisplayed,[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[SHARPNESS],[COLOR]and[HUE]cannotbeadjusted.
[RESET]Thesettingsandadjustmentsfor[PICTURE]willbereturnedtothefactorydefaultsettingswiththeexceptionofthefollowing;Presetnumbersand[REFERENCE]withinthe[PRESET]screen.Thesettingsandadjustmentsunder[DETAILSETTINGS]withinthe[PRESET]screenthatarenotcurrentlyselectedwill not be reset.
92
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[IMAGE OPTIONS]
Adjusting Clock and Phase [CLOCK/PHASE]ThisallowsyoutomanuallyadjustCLOCKandPHASE.
CLOCK ������������������� Use this item to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear� This function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image�This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time�
PHASE ������������������� Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk� (This is evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering�)Use [PHASE] only after the [CLOCK] is complete�
NOTE:The[CLOCK]and[PHASE]itemsareavailableforRGBsignalsonly.
93
5. Using On-Screen Menu
AdjustingHorizontal/VerticalPosition[HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL]Adjuststheimagelocationhorizontallyandvertically.
• Animagecanbedistortedduringtheadjustmentof[CLOCK]and[PHASE].Thisisnotmalfunction.
• Theadjustmentsfor[CLOCK],[PHASE],[HORIZONTAL],and[VERTICAL]willbestoredinmemoryforthecur-rentsignal.Thenexttimeyouprojectthesignalwiththesameresolution,horizontalandverticalfrequency,itsadjustments will be called up and applied.
Todeleteadjustmentsstoredinmemory,fromthemenu,youselect[SETUP]→[RESET]→[CURRENTSIGNAL]and reset the adjustments.
[BLANKING]Adjuststhedisplayrange(blanking)atthetop,bottom,leftandrightedgesoftheinputsignal.
SelectingOverscanPercentage[OVERSCAN]Selectoverscanpercentage(Auto,0%,5%and10%)forsignal.
Projected image
Overscaned by 10%
NOTE: • The[OVERSCAN]itemisnotavailable: -when[NATIVE]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO].
94
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Selecting the Aspect Ratio [ASPECT RATIO]Usethisfunctiontoselectthescreen’slateral:longitudinalaspectratio.Theprojectorautomaticallyidentifiesthesignalbeinginputandsetstheoptimumaspectratio.
For Computer signal
ForHDTV/SDTVsignals
Resolution AspectRatioVGA 640×480 4:3SVGA 800×600 4:3XGA 1024×768 4:3WXGA 1280×768 15:9WXGA 1280×800 16:10HD(FWXGA) 1366×768 approx.16:9WXGA+ 1440×900 16:10SXGA 1280×1024 5:4SXGA+ 1400×1050 4:3WXGA++ 1600×900 16:9UXGA 1600×1200 4:3WSXGA+ 1680×1050 16:10FHD(1080P) 1920×1080 16:9WUXGA 1920×1200 16:10WQXGA 2560×1600 16:10QuadHD 3840×2160 16:9QuadHD 4096×2160 19:7
Options Function
AUTO Theprojectorwillautomaticallydeterminetheincomingsignalanddisplayitinitsaspectratio.Theprojectormayerroneouslydeterminetheaspectratiodependingonitssignal.Ifthisoccurs,selecttheappropriateaspectratiofromthefollowing.
NORMAL Theimageisdisplayedinitsoriginalaspectratioofitsinputsignal..
4:3 Theimageisdisplayedin4:3aspectratio.
5:4 Theimageisdisplayedin5:4aspectratio
16:9 Theimageisdisplayedin16:9aspectratio
95
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Options Function
15:9 Theimageisdisplayedin15:9aspectratio
16:10 Theimageisdisplayedin16:10aspectratio
NATIVE Theprojectordisplaysthecurrentimageinitstrueresolutionwhentheincomingcomputersignalhasalowerorhigherresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution.(→page2)Whentheincomingcomputersignalhasahigherresolutionthantheprojector'snativeresolution,thecenterofanimagewillbedisplayed.
LETTERBOX Theimageofaletterboxsignal(16:9)isstretchedequallyinthehorizontalandverticaldirectionstofitthescreen.
WIDESCREEN Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin16:9.
ZOOM Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin4:3.Partsofthedisplayedimagearecroppedattheleftandrightedgesandthereforenotvisible.
FULL Projecttofullscreensize.
TIP:• Imagepositioncanbeadjustedverticallyusing[POSITION]whenthe[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]aspectratiosareselected.• Theterm“letterbox”referstoamorelandscape-orientedimagewhencomparedtoa4:3image,whichisthestandardaspect
ratio for a vide source. Theletterboxsignalhasaspectratioswiththevistasize“1.85:1”orcinemascopesize“2.35:1”formoviefilm.• Theterm“squeeze”referstothecompressedimageofwhichaspectratioisconvertedfrom16:9to4:3.
[INPUT RESOLUTION]Theresolutionisassignedautomaticallywhentheresolutionoftheinputsignalfromthecomputervideoinputterminal(analogRGB)cannotbedistinguished.
96
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[VIDEO]
Using Noise Reduction [NOISE REDUCTION]Whenprojectingavideoimage,youcanusethe[NOISEREDUCTION]functiontoreducethescreennoise(roughnessanddistortion).Thisdeviceisequippedwiththreetypesofnoisereductionfunctions.Selectthefunctionaccordingtothetypeofnoise.Dependingonthenoiselevel,thenoisereductioneffectcanbesetto[OFF],[LOW],[MEDIUM]or[HIGH].[NOISEREDUCTION]canbeselectedforSDTV,HDTVsignalandcomponentsignalinput.
RANDOM NR ��������� Reduces flickering random noise in an image� MOSQUITO NR ������ Reduces mosquito noise that appears around the edges of an image during Blu-ray playback�BLOCK NR ������������� Reduces block noise or mosaic-like patterns�
Selecting Interlaced Progressive Conversion Process Mode [DEINTERLACE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectaninterlaced-to-progressiveconversionprocessforvideosignals.
NORMAL ���������������� Automatically distinguishes a moving image from a static image to create a distinct image� Please select [MOVIE] if there are any obvious jitter and noises�
MOVIE ������������������� Select when projecting moving images� This is suitable for signals with a lot of jitter and noise�STILL ��������������������� Select when projecting static images� The video will flicker when a moving image is projected�
[CONTRAST ENHANCEMENT]Usingthecharacteristicsofthehumaneye,apicturequalitywithasenseofcontrastandresolutionisachieved.
OFF ������������������������ Suite vision is switched off�AUTO ��������������������� Contrast and picture quality are automatically improved using the suite vision function�NORMAL ���������������� Adjust the gain manually�
97
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[SIGNAL TYPE]SelectionofRGBandcomponentsignals.Normally,thisissetto[AUTO].Pleasechangethesettingifthecoloroftheimageremainsunnatural.
AUTO ��������������������� Automatically distinguishes RGB and component signals�RGB ����������������������� Switches to the RGB input�REC601 ������������������ Switches to the component signal conforming to the ITU-R Rec601 standard�
Setting appropriate to SDTV images�REC709 ������������������ Switches to the component signal conforming to the ITU-R Rec709 standard�
Setting appropriate to Hi-Vision images�REC2020 ���������������� Switches to the component signal conforming to the ITU-R Rec2020 standard�
Setting appropriate to 4K images�
[VIDEOLEVEL]SelectionofthevideosignallevelwhenconnectinganexternaldevicetotheHDMI1INterminal,HDMI2INterminal,DisplayPortinputterminal,andHDBaseTinputterminaloftheprojector.
AUTO ��������������������� The video level is switched automatically based on the information from the device outputting the signal�Depending on the connected device, this setting may not be made properly� In this case, switch to [NORMAL” or “ENHANCED” from the menu and view with the optimum setting�
NORMAL ���������������� This disables the enhanced mode�ENHANCED ������������ This improves the image’s contrast, expressing the dark and light sections more dynamically�SUPER WHITE ������� The video contrast is improved and the dark areas appear more dynamic�
[HDR MODE]
AUTO ��������������������� Automatically distinguishes HDR signal�OFF ������������������������ Projects the image based on the input signal ON ������������������������� Projects the image conforming to the HDR signal
Note:Theseoptionsareavailableexclusivelyfor4Ksignal.
98
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[3D SETTINGS]
Pleasereferto“3-9Projecting3Dvideos”(→page46)fortheoperation.
STEREOVIEWERStackupasingleormultipleprojectorsandcarryoutthesettingsforprojecting3Dvideos.Selecttheleft/rightset-tingsofthe3Deyewearusingthestereoviewer.
SINGLE ������������������ Use a single projector to project 3D videos�DUAL LEFT ������������ Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the left�DUAL RIGHT ���������� Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the right�
STEREO FILTERStackupasingleormultipleprojectorsandcarryout thesettings forprojecting3Dvideos. Imagesetting for3DglassesmadebyInfitec.
SINGLE ������������������ Use a single projector to project 3D videos�DUAL LEFT ������������ Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the left�DUAL RIGHT ���������� Use a dedicated projector for displaying videos on the right�
FORMATSelectthe3Dvideoformat(recording/transmissionformat).Selecttomatchthe3Dbroadcastand3Dmedia.Nor-mally,[AUTO]isselected.Pleaseselectthe3Dinputsignalformatwhenthe3Ddetectionsignaloftheformatcannotbedistinguished.
L/RINVERTInvertthedisplayorderoftheleftandrightvideos.Select[ON]ifyoufeeluncomfortablewiththe3Ddisplaywhen[OFF]isselected.
99
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Using the Lens Memory Function [LENS MEMORY]
ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvaluesforeachinputsignalwhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFO-CUSbuttonsoftheprojector.Adjustedvaluescanbeappliedtothesignalyouselected.Thiswilleliminatetheneedtoadjustlensshift,focus,andzoomatthetimeofsourceselection.
STORE ������������������� Stores the current adjusted values in memory for each input signal�MOVE �������������������� Applies the adjusted values to the current signal�RESET �������������������� Returns the adjusted values to the last condition�
• ThelensunitsNP11FL,NP12ZL,NP13ZL,NP14ZL,andNP30ZLdonotsupportthisfunction.
NOTE:• LensmemoryadjustmentswillbeautomaticallyregisteredtheENTRYLIST.TheselensmemoryadjustmentscanbeloadedfromtheENTRYLIST.(→ page 85)
Notethatperforming[CUT]or[ALLDELETE]intheENTRYLISTwilldeletelensmemoryadjustmentsaswellassourceadjust-ments. This deletion will not take effect until other adjustments is loaded.
• Forstoringeachadjustmentoflensshift,motorizedzoomandmotorizedfocusascommonvalueforallinputsignal,storethemas reference lens memory.
Tostoreyouradjustedvaluesin[LENSMEMORY]:1.Projecttheconnecteddevicesignalyouwanttoadjust.
2.Adjusttheprojectingimageofposition,sizeandfocusbytheLENSSHIFT/HOMEPOSITION,ZOOM+/−,andFOCUS+/−buttons.
• Adjustmentcanbeperformedbytheremotecontrol.Pleasereferto“AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition”on page 21.
• Slightadjustmentbymovingtheprojectorpositionandbythetiltfootisnotsubjectof[LENSMEMORY].
3.Movethecursoron[STORE]andpressENTER.
4.Movethecursoron[YES]andpressENTER.
100
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Tocalluptheadjustedvaluesfrom[LENSMEMORY]:1. Fromthemenu,select[ADJUST]→[LENSMEMORY]→[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton. During projection, if the adjusted values for an input signal have been saved, the lens will shift. If not, the lens will
shift according to the adjusted values stored in the selected [REF. LENS MEMORY] [PROFILE] number.
Toautomaticallyapplytheadjustedvaluesatthetimeofsourceselection:1. Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION]→[REF.LENSMEMORY]→[LOADBYSIGNAL]and
presstheENTERbutton.
2. Press the ▼buttontoselectand[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton. This will move the lens automatically to the position at the time of source selection according to the adjusted
values.
NOTE: • TheLensMemoryfunctionmaynotproduceacompletelyalignedimage(duetotolerancesinthelenses)usingtheadjustedvaluesstoredintheprojector.AftercallingupandapplyingtheadjustedvaluesfromtheLensMemoryfunction,finelyadjustthelens shift, zoom and focus to produce the best possible image.
101
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❻ Menu Descriptions & Functions [DISPLAY][PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE]
SUB INPUTSelecttheinputsignaltobedisplayedinthesub-display.Pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”(→page66)fordetailsontheoperation.
MODESelecteitherPIP(PICTUREINPICTURE)orPICTUREBYPICTUREwhenswitchingto2-screendisplay.
PICTURE SWAPThevideosinthemaindisplayandsub-displaywillbeswitched.Pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”(→page68)fordetails.
PIP SETTINGSelectthedisplayposition,positionadjustmentandsizeofthesub-displayinthePIPscreen.
START POSITION ��� Selection of the display position of the sub-display when switching to the PIP screen�HORIZONTAL POSITION ������������������������������ Adjust the display position of the sub-display in the horizontal direction� The respective corners will serve
as reference points�VERTICAL POSITION ������������������������������ Adjust the display position of the sub-display in the vertical direction� The respective corners will serve as
reference points�SIZE ����������������������� Select the display size of the sub-display�
102
5. Using On-Screen Menu
TIP:Thehorizontalpositionandverticalpositionaretheamountofmovementfromthereferencepoints.Forexample,whenTOP-LEFTis adjusted, the position is displayed with the same amount of movement even if displayed with other starting positions.The maximum amount of movement is half the resolution of the projector.
Reference pointAdjust using the horizon-tal position
Sub-display Main display
Reference point
Adjust using the vertical position
TOP-LEFT TOP-RIGHT
BOTTOM-LEFT BOTTOM-RIGHT
Reference pointReference point
BORDERSelectthedisplayboundaryofthemaindisplayandsub-displayofthe[PICTUREBYPICTURE]screen.
Display boundary
Main display Sub-displayMain display Sub-display Main displaySub-display
TIP:• ForWUXGAtype,sevenoptionsfromzerotosixareavailable.• ForWXGAtype/XGAtype,threeoptionsfromzerototwoareavailable.
103
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[GEOMETRIC CORRECTION]
MODESetpatternforcorrectingdistortion.If[OFF]isselected,the[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]becomesineffective.Ifyouneedtochangeeitherthe[MENUANGLE]or[MENUPOSITION],makesuretochangethesebeforeperformingthe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION].Ifeitherofthemischangedafterperformingthe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],corrected values will be reset to the default values.
KEYSTONECorrectdistortioninhorizontalandverticaldirections.
HORIZONTAL ��������� Adjustments when projecting from a diagonal direction to the screen�
VERTICAL �������������� Adjustments when projecting from the top or bottom direction to the screen�
TILT ����������������������� Adjusts the distortion when performing trapezoidal correction with the screen moved in the vertical direction using the lens shift�
THROW RATIO ������� Adjusts according to the projection ratio of the optional lens used�
Model name of lens unit
Adjustmentrange
NP11FL 8NP30ZL 8–10NP12ZL 12–15NP13ZL 15–30NP14ZL 29–47NP40ZL 8-11NP41ZL 13-30NP43ZL 30-60
NOTE:• Whenpowerissuppliedtothedevice,theadjustmentvalueofthe[KEYSTONE]usedpreviouslyisretainedevenifthegradient
of the device is changed.• Aselectricalcorrection iscarriedoutby [KEYSTONE], thebrightnessmaybe reducedor thescreenqualitymaydeteriorate
sometimes.
104
5. Using On-Screen Menu
CORNERSTONEDisplaythe4-pointcorrectionscreenandadjustthetrapezoidaldistortionoftheprojectionscreen.Pleasereferto“CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE]”(→page38)fordetailson the operation.
HORIZONTALCORNER/VERTICALCORNERDistortioncorrectionforcornerprojectionsuchaswallsurfaces.
HORIZONTAL CORNER ������������������������������ Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the horizontal direction�
* Reverse angle correction is also possible�VERTICAL CORNER ������������������������������ Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the vertical direction�
* Reverse angle correction is also possible�
NOTE:• Whenthemaximumadjustmentrangeisexceeded,distortionadjustmentisdisabled.Setuptheprojectoratanoptimalangleas
the deterioration in the image quality increases as the distortion adjustment volume gets larger.• Pleasenotethattheimagewillgooutoffocusduetothedifferenceinthedistancebetweentheupperandlowerorleftandrightsidesandthecenterofthescreenforprojectionscuttingacrosscorners.Lenseswithshortfocalpointsarealsonotrecommendedfor projections cutting across corners as the image will go out of focus.
105
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Adjustment method1.Alignthecursorwiththe[HORIZONTALCORNER]or[VERTICALCORNER]ofthe[GEOMETRICCORREC-
TION]menuandthenpresstheENTERbutton.
• Theadjustmentscreenwillbedisplayed.
2. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoalignthecursor(yellowbox)withthetargetadjustmentpointandthenpresstheENTERbutton.
• Thecursorwillchangeintoanadjustmentpoint(yellowincolor).
3. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoadjustthecornersorsidesofthescreenandthenpresstheENTERbutton.• Theadjustmentpointwillgobacktobeingacursor(yellowbox).
Explanation of screen transition
• Theadjustmentpointsofthefourcorners(a,c,fandhinthedrawing)willmoveindependently.
• Thefollowingadjustmentpointsdifferatthe[HORIZONTALCORNER]and[VERTICALCORNER].
HORIZONTAL CORNER: When Point b in the drawing is moved, and the upper side and Point g are moved, the lower side will move in a parallel manner.
VERTICAL CORNER: When Point d in the drawing is moved, and the left side and Point e are moved, the right side will move in a parallel manner.
[Adjustment points of the [HORIZONTAL CORNER] screen and movement points of the projection screen]
a
b
b c
d e
f g h
a c
d e
fg
h
Point b will be displaced in a parallel manner at the same time as Points a, b, c
Point g will be displaced in a parallel manner at the same time as Points f, g, h
[Adjustment points of the [VERTICAL CORNER] screen and movement points of the projection screen]
a
a
b
bc
cd
dee
f
f
g
gh
h
Point d will be displaced in a parallel manner at the same time as Points a, d, f
Point e will be displaced in a parallel manner at the same time as Points f, g, h
4. Start from Step 2 onwards to adjust the other points.
5.Whentheadjustmentiscompleted,pressthe▼▲◀▶buttonstoalignthecursorwiththe[EXIT]inthead-justmentscreenandthenpresstheENTERbutton.
• Switchtothe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]menuscreen.
TIP:AcommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisavailabletoperformcorrection.(→ page 40)
106
5. Using On-Screen Menu
WARPCorrectprojectedimagedistortiononaspecificsurfaceasacolumnorasphere.
NOTE:• Whenthemaximumadjustmentrangeisexceeded,distortionadjustmentisdisabled.Setuptheprojectoratanoptimalangle
since the more the adjustment volume gets large, the more image quality gets deterioration.• Pleasenotethattheimagewillgooutoffocusduetothedifferenceinthedistancebetweenperipheriesandthecenterofthescreenforprojectionscuttingacrosscornersasonacolumnorasphere.Lenseswithshortfocalpointsarealsonotrecommendedforprojections cutting across corners as the image will go out of focus.
Adjustment method1.Alignthecursorwiththe[WARP]ofthe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]menuandthepresstheENTER.
• Adjustmentscreenwillbedisplayedon.
2. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoalignthecursor(bluebox)withthetargetadjustmentpointandthenpresstheENTER.
• Thecursorwillchangeintoanadjustmentpoint(yellowincolor).
3. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoadjustthecornersorsidesofthescreenandthenpresstheENTER.• Thecursorwillbacktoyellowbox.
Explanation for correcting distortion
• Eightadjustmentpointscanbemovedindependently.
• Forleftandrightsides,use◀/▶ buttons for adjusting the range of distortion, and ▼/▲ buttons for adjusting the distortion peak.
• Fortopandbottomsides,use▼/▲ buttons for adjusting the range of distortion, and ◀/▶ buttons for adjusting the distortion peak.
• Forcorners,use▼▲◀▶ buttons for moving positions.
ab
c
e
h
d
gf
ba c
d e
fg
h
4. Foradjustingotherpoints,repeatStep2onwards.
5.Whentheadjustmentiscompleted,movethecursorontothe[EXIT]ontheadjustmentscreenandpresstheENTER.
• Thescreenwillbeswitchedtothe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]menu. The adjustment completion screen will be displayed on.
6.Press◀ or ▶buttontomovethecursoronto[OK]thenpress[ENTER].
• TheadjustedvaluesforWARParestoredandthescreendisplaygoesbacktothe[GEOMETRICCORREC-TION].
TIP:AcommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisavailabletoperformcorrection.(→ page 40)
107
5. Using On-Screen Menu
PC TOOLRecallthegeometriccorrectiondatathatisregisteredintheprojectorbeforehand.Threetypesofcorrectiondatacanberegistered.
NOTE:• Aselectricalcorrectioniscarriedout ingeometriccorrection,thebrightnessmaybeaffectedandthepicturequalitymaybe
degraded.
RESETResettheadjustmentvaluethathasbeensetupasMODEinGEOMETRICCORRECTION(returntotheinitialvalue).• ThisisineffectivewhenMODEissetOFF.• ResetcanbeexecutedbypressingandholdingtheGeometericbuttonontheremotecontrolforover2seconds.
108
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[EDGE BLENDING]
Thisadjuststheedges(boundaries)oftheprojectionscreenwhenprojectinghighresolutionvideosusingacombina-tionofseveralprojectorsintheup,down,leftandrightpositions.
MODEThisenablesordisablestheEDGEBLENDINGfunction.WhenMODEissettoON,theTOP,BOTTOM,LEFT,RIGHT,BLACKLEVELandBLENDCURVEsettingscanbeadjusted.
TOP/BOTTOM/LEFT/RIGHTThisselectstheEDGEBLENDINGlocationsontheleft,right,topandbottomonthescreen.Thefollowingsettingscanbeadjustedwhenanitemisselected.(→page70)
CONTROL �������������� Enable TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT and RIGHT functions�MARKER ���������������� Set whether to display marker or not when adjusting the range and display position� When turned on, a
magenta marker for adjusting the range adjustment and a green marker for adjusting the display position will be displayed�
RANGE ������������������� Adjust the range (width) of the edge blending�POSITION �������������� Adjust the display position of the edge blending�
BLACKLEVELDividethescreenintoninepartsandkeeptheblackleveluniformforeachprojector.TheninedivisionsscreensareTOP-LEFT,TOP-CENTER,TOP-RIGHT,CENTER-LEFT,CENTER,CENTER-RIGHT,BOTTOM-LEFT,BOTTOM-CENTERandBOTTOM-RIGHT.(→page74)
BLENDCURVESetbrightnessfortheEDGEBLENDINGsections.(→page73)
109
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[MULTI SCREEN]
WHITE BALANCEThisadjuststhewhitebalanceforeachprojectorwhenprojectingusingacombinationofseveralprojectors.Thiscanbeadjustedwhen[MODE]issetto[ON].
CONTRAST W, CONTRAST R, CONTRAST G, CONTRAST B ������������������������������ Adjusting the white color of the video�BRIGHTNESS W, BRIGHTNESS R, BRIGHTNESS G, BRIGHTNESS B ������������������������������ Adjusting the black color of the video�
PICTURE SETTINGThissetsthedivisionconditionwhenprojectingusingacombinationofseveralprojectors.Pleasereferto“4.Multi-ScreenProjection”(→page62)fordetails.
MODE OFF Use the projector in a standalone state.
ZOOM Thisadjuststhepositionandwidthofthevideoareathatyouwishtodivide.Theedgeblendingwidthwillalsobeautomaticallysettothatwidth.
TILING Thisassignsthedividedscreenstotheprojectors.Theedgeblendingfunctionwillalsobe set automatically.
ZOOM HORIZONTALZOOM
Thisenlargesthevideoareainthehorizontaldirection.
VERTICALZOOM
Thisenlargesthevideoareaintheverticaldirection.
HORIZONTALPOSITION
Thisshiftsthevideoareainthehorizontaldirection.
VERTICALPO-SITION
Thisshiftsthevideoareaintheverticaldirection.
TILING WIDTH Thisselectsthenumberofprojectorstobearrangedhorizontally.
HEIGHT Thisselectsthenumberofprojectorstobearrangedvertically.
HORIZONTALPOSITION
Thisselectsthepositionoftheprojectorstartingfromtheleftamongthosearrangedhorizontally.
VERTICALPO-SITION
Thisselectsthepositionoftheprojectorstartingfromthetopamongthosearrangedvertically.
110
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Conditions for using tiling• Alltheprojectorsneedtofulfilthefollowingconditions.
• Thepanelsizemustbethesame
• Theprojectionscreensizemustbethesame
• Theleftandrightendsortopandbottomendsoftheprojectionscreenmustbeconsistent.
• Thesettingsfortheleftandrightedgesoftheedgeblendingarethesame
• Thesettingsforthetopandbottomedgesoftheedgeblendingarethesame
Ifthetilingconditionsaresatisfied,thevideoscreenoftheprojectorateachinstallationpositionwillbeautomati-callyextractedandprojected.
Ifthetilingconditionsarenotsatisfied,adjustthevideoscreenoftheprojectorateachinstallationpositionusingthezoomfunction.
• AssignauniquecontrolIDtoeachprojector.
• Setthe“Colorsetting”and“DeepColorsetting”onyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerto“Auto”.Refertotheowner'smanualaccompaniedwithyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerformoreinformation.ConnectanHDMIoutputsignalofyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputertothefirstprojectorandthenconnecttotheHDBaseTOUT/EthernetportonthefirstprojectortotheHDBaseTIN/Ethernetportonthesecondprojector,sametothesequelprojectors..
Tilingsettingexample)Numberofhorizontalunits=2,Numberofverticalunits=2
Horizontal order = Second unitVertical order = First unit
111
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❼ Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]
[MENU(1)]
Selecting Menu Language [LANGUAGE] Youcanchooseoneof30languagesforon-screeninstructions.
NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
Selecting Menu Color [COLOR SELECT]Youcanchoosebetweentwooptionsformenucolor:COLORandMONOCHROME.
Turning On / Off Source Display [INPUT DISPLAY]ThisoptionturnsonoroffinputnamedisplaysuchasHDMI1,HDMI2,DisplayPort,COMPUTER,HDBaseTtobedisplayedonthetoprightofthescreen.
Turning messages on and off [MESSAGE DISPLAY]Thisoptionselectswhetherornottodisplayprojectormessagesatthebottomoftheprojectedimage.Evenwhen“OFF”isselected,thesecuritylockwarningisdisplayed.Thesecuritylockwarningturnsoffwhenthesecuritylockiscanceled.
Turning ON/OFF Control ID [ID DISPLAY]ID DISPLAY ����������� This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control
is pressed� (→ page 123)
112
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Turning On / Off Eco Message [ECO MESSAGE]Thisoptionturnsonoroffthefollowingmessageswhentheprojectoristurnedon.
TheEcoMessagepromptstheusertosaveenergy.When[OFF]isselectedfor[ECOMODE],youwillgetamessagetopromptyoutoselect[ON]for[ECOMODE].
When[ON]isselectedfor[ECOMODE]
Toclosethemessage,pressanyoneofthebuttons.Themessagewilldisappearifnobuttonoperationisdonefor30seconds.
When[OFF]isselectedfor[ECOMODE]
PressingtheENTERbuttonwilldisplaythe[ECOMODE]screen.(→page36)Toclosethemessage,presstheEXITbutton.
[3D CAUTION MESSAGE]Thisselectswhethertodisplayacautionmessageornotwhenswitchingtoa3Dvideo.ThedefaultconditionwhenshippedfromthefactoryisON.
OFF ������������������������ The 3D caution message screen will not be displayed�ON ������������������������� The 3D caution message screen will be displayed when switching to a 3D video� Press the ENTER button
to cancel the message�• Themessagewilldisappearautomaticallyafter60secondsorwhenotherbuttonsarepressed.Ifitdisap-
pears automatically, the 3D caution message will be displayed again when switching to a 3D video�
Selecting Menu Display Time [DISPLAY TIME]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecthowlongtheprojectorwaitsafterthelasttouchofabuttontoturnoffthemenu.Thepresetchoicesare[MANUAL],[AUTO5SEC],[AUTO15SEC],and[AUTO45SEC].The[AUTO45SEC]isthefactory preset.
Selecting Interval Time for Filter Message [FILTER MESSAGE]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthetimepreferencebetweendisplayingthemessageforcleaningthefilters.Cleanthefilterwhenyougetthemessage“PLEASECLEANFILTER.”(→page153)Fiveoptionsareavailable:OFF,100[H],500[H],2000[H],4000[H],5000[H],6000[H],7000[H],10000[H]Thedefaultsettingis[OFF].
NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
113
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[MENU(2)]
[MENU ANGLE]Selectthedirectionfordisplayingthemenu.
[MENU POSITION]Shiftthemenudisplayingposition.
HORISONTAL POSITION �����Shift the menu in the horizontal directions�VERTICAL POSITION ����������Shift the menu in the vertical directions�RESET ���������������������������������Reset the menu displaying position to the default factory setting (the screen center)�
TIP • Oncetheprojectorispoweredoff,themenudisplayingpositionwillresettothedefaultfactorysetting.• Inputterminalandmessagedisplayingpositionarenotinfluencedbythe[MENUPOSITION].• ItenablestomovethemenubymouseclickwhenacommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisconnected.• Itenablestomovethemenupositionbythe▼▲◀ and ▶buttonsholdingtopresstheCTLbuttonontheremotecontrolor
mouse click.• WhiletheMENUPOSITIONoftheon-screenmenuisdisplayedonandthemenuismovedbythe▼▲◀ and ▶ buttons holding topresstheCTLbuttonontheremotecontrol,theindicationofadjustedvalueonthemenuwillnotbechanged.Inthiscase,closetheMENUPOSITIONmenuonceanddisplayitagainforindicatingtheadjustedvalueproperly.
114
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[INSTALLATION]
Selecting Projector Orientation [ORIENTATION]Thisreorientsyourimageforyourtypeofprojection.Theoptionsare:desktopfrontprojection,ceilingrearprojection,desktoprearprojection,andceilingfrontprojection.
NOTE: • Pleaseconsulttheretailstoreifyourequirespecialinstallationservicese.g.whenmountingtheprojectortoaceiling.Neverinstall
the projector on your own. This may result in the projector falling down and causing injury to people.• Whenusingtheprojectorsuspendedfromaceiling,ensurethatpeopledonotstaybelowtheprojector.Intheeventthelamp
were to break, there is a risk that glass fragments may fall from the projector.
AUTO ��������������������� This automatically detects and projects the DESKTOP FRONT and CEILING FRONT�
NOTE:• TheDESKTOPREARandCEILINGREARwillnotbedetected.Pleaseselectmanually.
DESKTOPFRONT CEILINGREAR
DESKTOPREAR CEILINGFRONT
TIP:• CheckwhethertheautomaticDESKTOPFRONTisinstalledwithin±10degreesforfloorinstallationandwhethertheCEILINGFRONTiswithin±10degreesforceilinginstallation.Selectmanuallywhentheprojectionscreenisinverted.
115
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Selecting Aspect Ratio and Position for Screen [SCREEN][SCREEN TYPE]Setstheaspectratiooftheprojectionscreen.
FREE ���������������������� The ratio of the liquid crystal panel is selected� Select this when projecting multi-screen and 17:9 screen (2K)�
4:3 SCREEN ����������� For a screen with a 4:3 aspect ratio16:9 SCREEN ��������� For a screen with a 16:9 aspect ratio16:10 SCREEN ������� For a screen with a 16:10 aspect ratio
NOTE:• Afterchangingthescreentype,checkthesettingof[ASPECTRATIO]inthemenu.(→ page 94)
[POSITION]Adjustthescreenposition.Dependingonthemodelyouuseandthescreentype,thefunctionmaybecomeineffec-tiveandtheadjustablerangemayvary.
Using the Wall Color Correction [WALL COLOR]
Thisfunctionallowsforquickadaptivecolorcorrectioninapplicationswherethescreenmaterialisnotwhite.
NOTE:Selecting[WHITEBOARD]reduceslampbrightness.
Selecting Fan Mode [FAN MODE]FanModeisusedtosetthespeedoftheinternalcoolingfan.
MODE �������������������� Select one among four modes: AUTO, NORMAL, HIGH, and HIGH ALTITUDE�AUTO: The built-in fans automatically run at variable speed according to the detected temperature and atmospheric pressure by the built-in sensor�NORMAL: The built-in fans run at the appropriate speed based on the detection by the built-in temperature sensor�HIGH: The built-in fans run at high speedHIGH ALTITUDE: The built-in fans run at high speed� Select this option when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher�
NOTE: • Makesurethespeedissetto[HIGH]whenyouareusingthisdevicecontinuouslyforseveraldays.•Set[FANMODE]to[AUTO]or[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersor
higher.• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[AUTO]or[HIGHALTITUDE]
can cause the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector.
•Usingtheprojectorataltitudeslessthanapproximately5500feet/1700metersandsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]cancausethelamptoovercool,causingtheimagetoflicker.Switch[FANMODE]to[AUTO].
•Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofopticalcomponentssuchas the lamp.
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
116
5. Using On-Screen Menu
TIP: • When[HIGHALTITUDE]isselectedfor[FANMODE],asymbolicon will be displayed at the bottom of the menu.
[LIGHT MODE]Wheneco-modeissetto[ON],theCO2emissions(calculatedfromthereductioninpowerconsumption)oftheprojec-torcanbereduced.Theeco-modereducespowerconsumptionbymainlyloweringthebrightnessofthelamp.Asaresult,thelampreplacementtime(asaguide)*isextended.(→page37,136)* Replacementtimenotguaranteed.
REF� LIGHT ������������ This can be set when the eco-mode is set to [OFF]� Adjust the lamp to match the brightness of each projector when projecting a multi-screen display using multiple projectors�
ECOMODE OFF Thelampluminance(brightness)willbecome100%andthescreenwillturnbright.Theluminanceofthelampcanbesetusingthelampadjustment.
ON Thelampluminance(brightness)willbecomeapproximately70%andthelampreplacementtime(estimated)*willbeextended.* Thereplacementtimeisnotguaranteed.
REF.LIGHT Whenthe[MODE]forthe[PICTURE]inthe[ADJUST]is[STANDARD],andthe[ECOMODE]issetto[OFF],[REF.LIGHT]isenabled.Adjustthelamptomatchthebrightnessofeachprojectorwhenprojectingamulti-screendisplayusingmultipleprojectors.
[REF. WHITE BALANCE]Thisfeatureallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalanceforallsignals.Thewhiteandblacklevelsofthesignalareadjustedforoptimumcolorreproduction.Uniformityisalsoadjustedwhentheredness(R)andblueness(B)ofthewhitecolorinthescreen’shorizontal(left/right)directionareuneven.
CONTRAST R/CONTRAST G/CONTRAST B ������������������������������ These adjust the picture’s white color�BRIGHTNESS R/BRIGHTNESS G/BRIGHTNESS B ������������������������������ These adjust the picture’s black color�UNIFORMITY R ������ The further this is set to the + side, the stronger the redness on the left side of the picture (increasing
towards the left edge) and the weaker the redness on the right side of the picture (decreasing towards the right edge)�This is reversed when set to the – side�
UNIFORMITY B ������ The further this is set to the + side, the stronger the blueness on the left side of the picture (increasing towards the left edge) and the weaker the blueness on the right side of the picture (decreasing towards the right edge)�This is reversed when set to the – side�
[STATICCONVERGENCE]Thisfeaturesallowsyoutoadjustforcolordeviationinthepicture.Thiscanbeadjustedinunitsof±1pixelinthehorizontaldirectionforHORIZONTALR,GandB,intheverticaldirec-tionforVERTICALR,GandB.
117
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Using the Reference Lens Memory Function [REF. LENS MEMORY]ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvaluescommontoallinputsourceswhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFOCUSbuttonsoftheprojectorortheremotecontrol.Theadjustedvaluesstoredinmemorycanbeusedasareference to the current.
PROFILE ���������������� Select a stored [PROFILE] number�STORE ������������������� Stores the current adjusted values in memory as a reference�MOVE �������������������� Applies the adjusted reference values stored in [STORE] to the current signal�RESET �������������������� Reset selected [PROFILE] number [REF� LENS MEMORY] to the factory default settings�LOAD BY SIGNAL �� When you switch signals the lens will shift to the lens shift, zoom, and focus values for the selected [PRO-
FILE] number�If no adjusted values have been saved to [LENS MEMORY], the lens will apply [REF� LENS MEMORY] adjusted values� Alternatively, if no adjusted values have been saved to [REF� LENS MEMORY], the unit will return to factory default settings�
FORCED MUTE ������ To turn off the image during lens shift, select [YES]�
• ThelensunitsNP11FL,NP12ZL,NP13ZL,NP14ZL,andNP30ZLdonotsupportthisfunction.
NOTE:• Adjustedvaluesin[REF.LENSMEMORY]willnotbereturnedtodefaultwhenperforming[CURRENTSIGNAL]or[ALLDATA]for[RESET]fromthemenu.
• Tostoreadjustedvaluesforeachinputsource,usetheLensMemoryfunction.(→ page 56, 99)
[LENS CALIBRATION]Theadjustmentrangeofthezoom,focus,andshiftofthemountedlensiscalibrated.Besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION]afterreplacingthelens.
118
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[CONTROL]
TOOLS
ADMINISTRATOR MODEThisallowsyoutoselectMENUMODE,savesettings,andsetapasswordfortheadministratormode.
MENUMODE Selecteither[BASIC]or[ADVANCED]menu.(→page78)
—
NOTSAVESETTINGVALUES
Placingacheckmarkwillnotsaveyourprojectorsettings.Clearthischeckboxtosaveyourprojectorsettings.
—
NEWPASSWORD/CONFIRMPASS-WORD
Assignapasswordfortheadministratormode. Upto10alphanumericcharacters
119
5. Using On-Screen Menu
PROGRAM TIMER
Thisoptionturnson/standbytheprojectorandchangesvideosignals,andselectsLIGHTmodeautomaticallyataspecifiedtime.
NOTE:• Beforeusing[PROGRAMTIMER],makesurethatthe[DATEANDTIME]featureisset.(→ page 122) MakesurethattheprojectorisinthestandbyconditionwiththePOWERcordconnected. The projector has a built-in clock. The clock will keep working for about a month after the main power is turned off. If the main powerisnotsuppliedtotheprojectorforamonthormore,itrequirestoset[DATEANDTIMESETTINGS]featureagain.
Setting a new program timer1.OnthePROGRAMTIMERscreen,usethe▲ or ▼buttontoselect[SETTINGS]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [PROGRAM LIST] screen will be displayed.
2. SelectablankprogramnumberandpresstheENTERbutton.
The [ (EDIT)] screen will be displayed.
3.Makesettingsforeachitemasrequired.
ACTIVE ������������������ Place a check mark to enable the program�
120
5. Using On-Screen Menu
DAY ������������������������ Select days of the week for the program timer� To execute the program from Monday to Friday, select [MON-FRI]� To execute the program in everyday basis, select [EVERYDAY]�
TIME ���������������������� Set the time to execute the program� Enter time in 24-hour format�FUNCTION ������������� Select a function to be executed� Selecting [POWER] will allow you to turn on or off the projector by setting
[ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [INPUT] will allow you to select a video source by setting [ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [ECO MODE] will allow you to select ON or OFF for [ECO MODE] by setting [ADVANCED SETTINGS]�
ADVANCED SETTINGS ������������������������������ Select power on/off, a type of video source, or ECO MODE for the selected item in [FUNCTION]�REPEAT ������������������ Place a check mark to repeat the program continuing basis� To use the program this week only, clear the
check mark�4. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
This will complete the settings.
You will be returned to the [PROGRAM LIST] screen.
5. Select[ (BACK)]andpresstheENTERbutton.
You will be returned to the [PROGRAM TIMER] screen.
6. Select[EXIT]andpresstheENTERbutton.
You will be returned to the [TOOLS] screen.
NOTE:• Upto30differenttimersettingscanbeprogrammed.• TheProgramTimerisexecutedonasettimebasis,notinaprogrambasis.• Oncetheprogramnotmarkedwithacheckin[REPEAT]hasbeenexecuted,thecheckmarkinthe[ACTIVE]checkboxwillbe
cleared automatically and the program will be disabled.• Whentheon-timeandtheoff-timesetforthesametime,theoff-timesettingwilltakepreference.• Whentwodifferentsourcesaresetforthesametime,thelargerprogramnumberwilltakepreference.• Theon-timesettingwillnotbeexecutedwhilethecoolingfansarerunningoranerrorisoccurring.• Iftheoff-timesettingisexpiredundertheconditioninwhichthepoweroffisnotpossible,theoff-timersettingwillnotbeexecuted
until the power off becomes possible.• Programsnotmarkedwithacheckmarkin[ACTIVE]ofthe[EDIT]screenwillnotbeexecutedeveniftheProgramTimeris
enabled.• Whentheprojectoristurnedonbyusingtheprogramtimerandifyouwanttoturnofftheprojector,settheoff-timeordoit
manually so as not to leave the projector on for a long period of time.
121
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Activating the program timer
1. Select[ENABLE]onthe[PROGRAMTIMER]screenandpresstheENTERbutton.
The selection screen will be displayed.
2. Press the ▼buttontoalignthecursorwith[ON]andthenpresstheENTERbutton. Return to the [PROGRAM TIMER] screen.
NOTE:• Whentheeffectivesettingsofthe[PROGRAMTIMER]havenotbeensetto[ON],theprogramwillnotbeexecutedevenifthe[ACTIVE]itemsintheprogramlisthavebeenticked.
• Evenwhentheeffectivesettingsofthe[PROGRAMTIMER]aresetto[ON],the[PROGRAMTIMER]willnotworkuntilthe[PRO-GRAMTIMER]screenisclosed.
Editing the programmed settings
1.Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramyouwanttoeditandpresstheENTERbutton.
2.Changethesettingsonthe[EDIT]screen.
3. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The programmed settings will be changed.
You will be returned to the [PROGRAM LIST] screen.
Changing the order of programs
1.Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramwhoseorderyouwanttochangeandpressthe▶ button.
2. Press the ▼ button to select ▲ or ▼.
3.PresstheENTERbuttonafewtimestoselectarowtowhichyouwishtomovetheprogram.
The order of the programs will be changed.
Deleting the programs
1.Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramnumberyouwanttodeleteandpressthe▶ button.
2. Press the ▼buttontoselect[ (DELETE)].
3.PresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
4. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The program will be deleted.
This will complete deleting the program.
122
5. Using On-Screen Menu
DATE AND TIME SETTINGS
Youcansetthecurrenttime,month,date,andyear.NOTE: The projector has a built-in clock. The clock will keep working for about a month after the main power is turned off. If the main power is off for a month or more, the built-in clock will cease. If the built-in clock ceases, set the date and time again. The built-in clock will not cease while in the standby mode. In order to activate the built-in clock continuously even when the projector is not used, leave it in the standby state not plugging off the power cord.
TIME ZONE SETTINGS �������������� Select your time zone�DATE AND TIME SETTINGS ������ Set your current date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM)�
INTERNET TIME SERVER: If you place a check mark, the projector’s built-in clock will be syn-chronized with an Internet time server in every 24 hours and at the time of projector’s startup�UPDATE: Synchronizes the projector’s built-in clock immediately� The UPDATE button is not available unless the INTERNET TIME SERVER check box is turned on�
SUMMER TIME SETTINGS ������� If you place a check mark, the clock for daylight saving will be enabled�
[MOUSE]ThisfunctionisforusingacommerciallyavailableUSBmouseviatheUSB-Aportonthisprojector.
BUTTON ����������������� Select for using the mouse either by right or left hand�SENSITIVITY ���������� Select the sensitivity of mouse among FAST, MIDDLE and LOW�
NOTE:ThissettingisnotguaranteedmotionofallcommerciallyavailableUSBmouses.
Disabling the Cabinet Buttons [CONTROL PANEL LOCK]ThisoptionturnsonorofftheCONTROLPANELLOCKfunction.NOTE:• Howtocancelthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK] Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]issetto[ON],presstheINPUTbuttononthemainbodyforabout10secondstocancelthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]setting.
TIP: • Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon,akeylockicon[ ]willbedisplayedatthebottomrightofthemenu.• ThisCONTROLPANELLOCKdoesnotaffecttheremotecontrolfunctions.
Enabling Security [SECURITY]ThisfeatureturnsonorofftheSECURITYfunction.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,theprojectorcannotprojectanimage.(→page43)NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
Selecting Communication Speed [COMMUNICATION SPEED]ThisfeaturesetsthecommunicationspeedforthePCControlport(D-Sub9P).Makesuretosettheappropriatespeed for the device to connect.
NOTE:• Yourselectedcommunicationspeedwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
123
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Setting ID to the Projector [CONTROL ID]YoucanoperatemultipleprojectorsseparatelyandindependentlywiththesingleremotecontrolthathastheCONTROLIDfunction.IfyouassignthesameIDtoalltheprojectors,youcanconvenientlyoperatealltheprojectorstogetherusingthesingleremotecontrol.Todoso,youhavetoassignanIDnumbertoeachprojector.
CONTROL ID NUMBER �������Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector�CONTROL ID �����������������������Select [OFF] to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select [ON] to turn on the CONTROL ID setting�
NOTE: • When[ON]isselectedfor[CONTROLID],theprojectorcannotbeoperatedbyusingtheremotecontrolthatdoesnotsupporttheCONTROLIDfunction.(Inthiscasethebuttonsontheprojectorcabinetcanbeused.)
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.•PressingandholdingtheENTERbuttonontheprojectorcabinetfor10secondswilldisplaythemenuforcancelingtheControlID.
Assigning or Changing the Control ID1. Turnontheprojector.
2.PresstheIDSETbuttonontheremotecontrol.
The CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.
If the projector can be operated with the current remote control ID, the [AC-TIVE] will be displayed. If the projector cannot be operated with the current remote control ID, the [INACTIVE] will be displayed. To operate the inactive projector, assign the control ID used for the projector by using the following procedure (Step 3).
3.PressoneofnumerickeypadbuttonswhilepressingandholdingtheIDSETbuttonontheremotecontrol.
Example:
To assign “3”, press the “3” button on the remote control.
No ID means that all the projectors can be operated together with a single remote control. To set “No ID”, enter “000” or press the CLEAR button.
TIP:TherangeofIDsisfrom1to254.4.ReleasetheIDSETbutton.
The updated CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.
NOTE: •TheIDscanbeclearedinafewdaysafterthebatteriesarerundownorremoved.•AccidentallypressinganyoneofthebuttonsoftheremotecontrolwillclearcurrentlyspecifiedIDwithbatteriesremoved.
124
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Turning On or Off Remote Sensor [REMOTE SENSOR]Thisoptiondetermineswhichremotesensorontheprojectorisenabledinwirelessmode.Theoptionsare:FRONT/BACK,FRONT,BACK,andHDBaseT*.
NOTE:• TheremotecontroloftheprojectorwillnotbeabletoreceivesignalsifthepowersupplyoftheHDBaseTtransmissiondeviceconnectedtotheprojectorisswitchedonwhenthishasbeensetto“HDBaseT”.
TIP:• Iftheremotecontrolsystemdoesnotfunctionwhendirectsunlightorstrongilluminationstrikestheremotecontrolsensorof
the projector, change to other option.
125
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[NETWORK SETTINGS]
Important:• Consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutthesesettings.• WhenusingawiredLAN,connecttheEthernetcable(LANcable)totheLANportontheprojector.(→ page 152) • Pleaseuseashieldedtwistedpair(STP)cableofCategory5eorhigherfortheLANcable(soldcommercially).
TIP:Thenetworksettingsyoumakewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
Hints on How to Set Up LAN Connection
To set up the projector for a LAN connection:Select[WIREDLAN]→[PROFILES]→[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2].TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLAN.Nextturnonorofffor[DHCP],[IPADDRESS],[SUBNETMASK],and[GATEWAY]andselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page126)TorecallLANsettingsstoredintheprofilenumber:Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwiredLAN,andthenselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page126)To connect a DHCP server:Turnon[DHCP]forwiredLAN.Select[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.TospecifyIPaddresswithoutusingtheDHCPserver,turnoff[DHCP].(→page126)
To receive lamp replacement time or error messages via e-mail:Select[ALERTMAIL],andset[SENDER'SADDRESS],[SMTPSERVERNAME],and[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS].Last,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page128)
126
5. Using On-Screen Menu
WIRED LAN
INTERFACE Select[LAN]forusingtheLANportforconnectingtothewiredLAN.Select[HDBaseT]forusingtheHDBaseTIN/EthernetportforconnectingtothewiredLAN.ThecontrolfromtheconnecteddevicewillbedisabledifnosignalissentandreceivedforthreeminutesiftheprojectorisconnectedtowiredLANthrutheHD-BaseTIN/Ethernet.Forrefusingthis,set thestandbymodeto[SLEEP]inadvance.
—
PROFILES • ThesettingsforthewiredLANcanberecordedintheprojectormemory in two ways.
• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]andthendosettingsfor[DHCP]andtheotheroptions.
Afterdoingthis,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.Thiswillstoreyoursettingsinmemory.
• Torecallthesettingsfrommemory: Afterselecting[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]fromthe[PRO-FILES]list.
Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.• Select[DISABLE]whennotconnectingtoawiredLAN
—
DHCP PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassignanIPaddresstotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.ClearthischeckboxtoregistertheIPaddressorsubnetmasknumberobtainedfromyournetworkadministrator.
—
IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numericcharacters
SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numericcharacters
GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numericcharacters
AUTODNS PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassigntheIPaddressofyourDNSserverconnectedtotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.ClearthischeckboxtosettheIPaddressofyourDNSserverconnected to the projector.
Upto12numericcharacters
DNSCONFIGURA-TION
SettheIPaddressofyourDNSserveronthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[AUTODNS]iscleared.
Upto12numericcharacters
RECONNECT Retrytoconnecttheprojectortoanetwork.Trythisifyouhavechanged[PROFILES].
—
127
5. Using On-Screen Menu
PROJECTORNAME
PROJECTORNAME Setauniqueprojectorname. Upto16alphanu-meric characters and symbols
DOMAINSetahostnameanddomainnameoftheprojector.
HOSTNAME Setahostnameoftheprojector. Upto16alphanumericcharacters
DOMAINNAME Setadomainnameoftheprojector. Upto60alphanumericcharacters
128
5. Using On-Screen Menu
ALERT MAIL
ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroflampreplacetimeorerrormessagesviae-mailwhenusingwirelessorwiredLAN.
Placing a checkmark will turn on the Alert Mail feature�Clearing a checkmark will turn off the Alert Mail feature�
Sample of a message to be sent from the projector:
Thelamphasreachedtheendofitsusablelife.Please replace the lamp.Usethespecifiedlampforsafetyandperformance.[Information]ProjectorName:xxxxxLampHoursUsed:xxxxx[H]
—
HOSTNAME Typeinahostname. Upto16alphanumericcharacters
DOMAINNAME Typeinadomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector. Upto60alphanumericcharacters
SENDER'SAD-DRESS
Specifythesender’saddress. Upto60alphanu-meric characters and symbols
SMTPSERVERNAME
TypeintheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector. Upto60alphanumericcharacters
RECIPIENT'SAD-DRESS1,2,3
Typeinyourrecipient’saddress. Upto60alphanu-meric characters and symbols
TESTMAIL Sendatestmailtocheckifyoursettingsarecorrect.NOTE:• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail. Should this happen, check if theRecipient’sAddress iscorrectly set.
• Unless any one of the [SENDER'SADDRESS], [SMTPSERVER'SNAME]or[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS1-3]isselected,[TESTMAIL]isnot available.
• Besuretohighlight[OK]andpresstheENTERbuttonbeforeexecuting[TESTMAIL].
—
129
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NETWORKSERVICE
HTTPSERVER SetapasswordforyourHTTPserver. Upto10alphanumericcharacters
PJLink This option allows you to set a passwordwhen you use thePJLinkfeature.NOTE: • Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,
consult with your dealer. • WhatisPJLink? PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectors
of different manufacturers. This standard protocol is established by JapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssocia-tion(JBMIA)in2005.
TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.• SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefrom
the menu.
Upto32alphanumericcharacters
AMXBEACON TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.
TIP: WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrol system will recognize the device and download the appropriate DeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.
Placing a checkmark will enable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery�Clearing a checkmark will disable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery�
—
CRESTRON ROOMVIEW:TurnonoroffwhencontrollingtheprojectorfromyourPC.CRESTRONCONTROL:Turn on or offwhen controlling theprojector from your controller.• CONTROLLERIPADDRESS:EnteryourIPaddressofCREST-RONSERVER.
• IPID:EnteryourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.
Upto12numericcharacters
ExtronXTP SetforconnectingthisprojectortotheExtronXTPtransmitter.ONwillenabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.OFFwilldisabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.
—
TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCRESTRONROOMVIEW.Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com
130
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[SOURCE OPTIONS]
SettingAutoAdjust[AUTOADJUST]ThisfeaturesetstheAutoAdjustmodesothatthecomputersignalcanbeautomaticallyormanuallyadjustedfornoiseandstability.Youcanautomaticallymakeadjustmentintwoways:[NORMAL]and[FINE].
OFF ������������������������ The computer signal will not be automatically adjusted� You can manually optimize the computer signal�NORMAL ���������������� Default setting� The computer signal will be automatically adjusted� Normally select this option�FINE ����������������������� Select this option if fine adjustment is needed� It takes more time to switch to the source than when [NOR-
MAL]is selected�
TIP:• Thedefaultsettingwhenshippedfromthefactoryis[NORMAL].• WhentheAUTOADJ.buttonispressed,thesame[FINE]adjustmentiscarriedout.
[AUDIO SELECT]ThisselectstheaudioinputoftheHDMI1INterminal,HDMI2INterminal,DisplayPortinputterminalandHDBaseTIN/Ethernetport.
Selecting Default Source [DEFAULT INPUT SELECT]Youcansettheprojectortodefaulttoanyoneofitsinputseachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.
LAST ���������������������� Sets the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned on�AUTO ��������������������� Searches for an active source in order of HDMI1 → HDMI2 → DisplayPort → COMPUTER → HDBaseT and
displays the first found source�HDMI1 ������������������� Displays the digital source from the HDMI 1 IN connector every time the projector is turned on� HDMI2 ������������������� Displays the digital source from the HDMI 2 IN connector every time the projector is turned on� DisplayPort ������������ Displays the digital source from the DisplayPort every time the projector is turned on� COMPUTER ����������� Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER IN connector every time the projector is turned on�HDBaseT ���������������� Project the HDBaseT signal�
[SEAMLESS SWITCHING]Whentheinputconnectorisswitched,theimagedisplayedbeforeswitchingisheldtoswitchtothenewimagewithoutabreakduetoabsenceofasignal.
Selecting a Color or Logo for Background [BACKGROUND]Usethisfeaturetodisplayablue/blackscreenorlogowhennosignalisavailable.Thedefaultbackgroundis[BLUE].
NOTE: • Evenwhenthebackgroundlogoisselected,iftwopicturesaredisplayedin[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]mode,thebluebackground
is displayed without the logo when there is no signal.
131
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[HDBaseT OUT SELECT]SelectsignaltooutputfromtheHDBaseTOUT/Ethernetportontheprojector.Whentwoimagesareprojectedsimul-taneously(PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE),theimageforthemainscreenisoutput.
AUTO ��������������������� Output the input signal� When [PIP] has been set, the input signal for the main screen is output�HDMI1 ������������������� Output the input signal thru the HDMI1 input terminal�HDMI2 ������������������� Output the input signal thru the HDMI2 input terminal�DisplayPort ������������ Output the input signal thru the DisplayPort IN terminal�HDBaseT ���������������� Output the input signal thru the HDBaseT IN/Ethernet port�
NOTE:• SignalthrutheCOMPUTERinputterminalcannotbeoutput.Inthestate[PIP]or[PICTUREBYPICTURE]hasbeensetand[AUTO]hasbeensetforthisfunction,moreover,theinputterminalforthemainscreenistheCOMPUTERandtheinputterminalforthesubscreenisoneamongtheHDMI1IN,HDMI2IN,DisplayPortINterminals,orHDBaseTIN/Ethernetport,thesignalfromthe sub screen will be output.
• Ifthesetinputterminalsformainandsubscreenfor[PIP]and[PICTUREBYPICTURE]aredifferedfromtheselectedinputterminals, any image will be output.
• 4K60pand4K50psignalscannotbeoutput.
[EDIDVERSION]SwitchtheEDIDversionfortheHDMI1INandHDMI2INterminals.
MODE1 ������������������ Supports general signalMODE2 ������������������ Supports 4K signal
Select this mode for displaying 4K image using the device supporting 4K
NOTE:Ifimageandsoundcannotbeoutputin[MODE2],switchto[MODE1].
[HDCPVERSION]SwitchtheHDCPversionfortheHDMI1IN,HDMI2INandHDBaseTIN/Ethernetterminals.
HDCP2�2 ���������������� Automatically switch the mode HDCP2�2 and HDCP1�4 HDCP1�4 ���������������� Forcedly perform transmission with HDCP1�4
NOTE:• IfimageandsoundcannotbeoutputfromthemonitorconnectedwiththeHDBaseTOUT/Ethernetport,switchtheHDCPversiontoHDCP1.4.
132
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[POWER OPTIONS]
[STANDBY MODE]Selectthestandbymode:
NORMAL ���������������� Automatically transit the standby state and control consumption power based on the projector setting and the state of the connected device� (→ page 183)
SLEEP �������������������� Maintain the state of sleep� Consumption power becomes higher than the setting of NORMAL� Select this mode in the following cases:• ForusingtheHDBaseTIN/EthernetandHDBaseTOUT/Ethernetportsconstantly.• ForusingtheUSB-Aportconstantly.
[EXAMPLE]- For connecting plural numbers of projector in a daisy chain� (→ page 149)- For connecting to a HDBaseT transmission device (→ page 148)
TIP: • The[STANDBYMODE]settingisnotchangedby[RESET].• ConsumptionpowerintheSTANDBYmodeisexcludedfromthecalculationforcarbonsaving.
Enabling Direct Power On [DIRECT POWER ON]Turnstheprojectoronautomaticallywhenthepowercordisinsertedintoanactivepoweroutlet.ThiseliminatestheneedtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolorprojectorcabinet.
Turning On the Projector by Detecting Input Signal [AUTO POWER ON SELECT]Underthestateofstandbyorsleep,theprojectorautomaticallydetectsandprojectssynchronizingsignalinputfromtheselectedterminalsamongComputer,HDMI1/2,DisplayPort,andHDBaseTbythisfunction.
OFF ������������������������ AUTO POWER ON SELECT function becomes inactive�HDMI1, HDMI2, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT* ������������������������������ When the projector detects the computer signal input from the selected terminal, automatically it will be
turned ON and will project the computer screen�
NOTE: • Ifyouwant toactivate thisAUTOPOWERONSELECTfunctionafterpoweringOFFtheprojector, interruptsignal frominput
terminals or pull out the computer cable from the projector and wait for over 3 seconds and then input signal from the selected terminal.Incasecomputersignaliscontinuouslyinputtotheprojector,howevertheprojectoristurnedOFFandisinthetransitiontoSLEEPmode,itwillkeepSLEEPmodeandwillnotbeturnedONautomatically.Inaddition,ifsignalfromHDMI1/2,DisplayPortorHDBaseTiscontinuouslyinputtotheprojector,theprojectormaybeturnedONagainautomaticallybasedonthesettingofexternaldeviceseveniftheprojectoristurnedOFFandintheconditionofSLEEPmode.
• ThisfunctionisnotactivatedeitherbycomponentsignalinputfromthecomputerscreeninputterminalorcomputersignalasSynconGreenandCompositeSync.
133
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Enabling Power Management [AUTO POWER OFF]Whenthisoptionisselectedyoucanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoff(attheselectedtime:0:05,0:10,0:15,0:20,0:30,1:00)ifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.
Using Off Timer [OFF TIMER]1. Selectyourdesiredtimebetween30minutesand16hours:OFF,0:30,1:00,2:00,4:00,8:00,12:00,16:00.
2.PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrol.
3. TheremainingtimestartscountingdownanditisdisplayedatthebottomoftheOn-ScreenMenu.
4. Theprojectorwillturnoffafterthecountdowniscomplete.
NOTE:• Tocancelthepresettime,set[OFF]forthepresettimeorturnoffthepower.• Whentheremainingtimereaches3minutesbeforetheprojectoristurnedoff,the[THEPROJECTORWILLTURNOFFWITHIN3MINUTES]messagewillbedisplayedonthebottomofthescreen.
134
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Returning to Factory Default [RESET]TheRESETfeatureallowsyoutochangeadjustmentsandsettingstothefactorypresetfora(all)source(s)exceptthefollowing:
[CURRENT SIGNAL]Resetstheadjustmentsforthecurrentsignaltothefactorypresetlevels.Theitemsthatcanberesetare:[PRESET],[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[COLOR],[HUE],[SHARPNESS],[AS-PECTRATIO],[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],[PHASE],and[OVERSCAN].
[ALL DATA]Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypreset.All items can be resetEXCEPT [ENTRYLIST], [LANGUAGE], [BACKGROUND], [FILTERMESSAGE], [EDGEBLENDING],[MULTISCREEN],[SCREENTYPE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[REF.WHITEBALANCE],[STATICCONVERGENCE],[REF.LENSMEMORY],[ADMINISTRATORMODE],[CONTROLPANELLOCK],[SECURITY],[COMMUNICATIONSPEED],[DATEANDTIMESETTINGS],[CONTROLID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[EDIDVERSION],[HDCPVERSION],[LAMPLIFEREMAINING],[LAMPHOURSUSED],[FILTERHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],[WIREDLAN].Toresetthelampusagetime,see“ClearingLampHourMeter[CLEARLAMPHOURS]”below.
[ALLDATA(INCLUDINGENTRYLIST)]Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalsincludingthe[ENTRYLIST]tothefactorypresetexcept[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[FILTERMESSAGE],[EDGEBLENDING],[MULTISCREEN],[SCREENTYPE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION], [REF.WHITEBALANCE], [STATICCONVERGENCE], [REF. LENSMEMORY],[ADMINISTRATORMODE], [CONTROLPANELLOCK], [SECURITY], [COMMUNICATIONSPEED], [DATEANDTIMESETTINGS],[CONTROLID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[EDIDVERSION],[HDCPVERSION],[LAMPLIFEREMAINING],[LAMPHOURSUSED],[FILTERHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],[WIREDLAN].Alsodeletesallthesignalsinthe[ENTRYLIST]andreturnstothefactorypreset.
NOTE:LockedsignalsinEntryListcannotbereset.
Clearing Lamp Hour Meter [CLEAR LAMP HOURS]Resetsthe lampclockbacktozero.Selectingthisoptiondisplayssubmenuforaconfirmation.Select [YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
NOTE: • Elapsedtimeofthelampusewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.• Performing[CLEARLAMPHOURS]willreturnthe[REF.LIGHT]in[LIGHTMODE]toitsdefaultadjustments.Whentheprojectorisusedformulti-screenprojection,use[REF.LIGHT]toadjustthebrightnessagain.
135
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Clearing the Filter Usage Hours [CLEAR FILTER HOURS]Resetsthefilterusagebacktozero.Selectingthisoptiondisplayssubmenuforaconfirmation.Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The[OFF]itemisselectedfor[FILTERMESSAGE]atthetimeofshipment.When[OFF]isselected,youdonotneedtoclearthefilterusagehour.
NOTE:Elapsedtimeofthefilterusewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
136
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❽ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]Displaysthestatusofthecurrentsignalandlampusage.Thisitemhasninepages.Theinformationincludedisasfollows:
TIP:PressingtheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolwillshowthe[INFO.]menuitems.
[USAGE TIME]
[LAMPLIFEREMAINING](%)*[LAMPHOURSUSED](H)[FILTERHOURSUSED](H)[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS](kg-CO2)
* Theprogressindicatorshowsthepercentageofremainingbulblife.
Thevalueinformsyouoftheamountoflampusage.Whentheremaininglamptimereaches0,theLAMPLIFEREMAININGbarindicatorchangesfrom0%to100Hoursandstartscountingdown.
• ThemessagetotheeffectthatthelamporthefiltersshouldbereplacedwillbedisplayedforoneminutewhentheprojectoristurnedonandwhenthePOWERbuttonontheprojectorortheremotecontrolispressed.
Todismissthismessage,pressanybuttonontheprojectorortheremotecontrol.
NP42LPLamplife(H) PA803U PA723U PA653U PA853W PA703W PA903W
ECOmodeOFF 3000 3500 4000 3000 4000 3000
ECOmode 5000
• [TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]
Thisdisplaystheestimatedcarbonsavinginformationinkg.Thecarbonfootprintfactorinthecarbonsavingcal-culationisbasedontheOECD(2008Edition).(→page37)
137
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[SOURCE(1)]
INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTIONHORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICALFREQUENCYSYNCTYPE SYNCPOLARITYSCANTYPE SOURCENAMEENTRYNO.
[SOURCE(2)]
SIGNALTYPE BITDEPTHVIDEOLEVEL SAMPLINGFREQUENCY3DFORMAT
[SOURCE(3)]
INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTIONHORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICALFREQUENCYSYNCTYPE SYNCPOLARITYSCANTYPE SOURCENAMEENTRYNO.
138
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[SOURCE(4)]
SIGNALTYPE BITDEPTHVIDEOLEVEL SAMPLINGFREQUENCY3DFORMAT
[WIRED LAN]
IPADDRESS SUBNETMASKGATEWAY MACADDRESS
[VERSION]
FIRMWARE DATAFIRMWARE2
139
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[OTHERS]
DATETIME PROJECTORNAMEMODELNO. SERIALNUMBERLENSID
[CONDITIONS]
INTAKETEMPERATURE EXHAUSTTEMPERATUREATMOSPHERICPRESSURE INSTALLATIONPOSITIONX-AXIS Y-AXISZ-AXIS
AbouttheX-AXIS,Y-AXISandZ-AXISCONDITIONS* ArrowdirectionoftheZ-AXISinthefigurerepresentsthetopoftheprojector.
X-AXIS ������������������� Display the projector image at an angle of −100 – +100 degrees to the horizontal in the X-axis direction�
X-AXIS value of the projector
Horizontal plane X-axis
Gravity direction
Y-AXIS ������������������� Display the projector image at an angle of −100 – +100 degrees to the horizontal in the Y-axis direction�
Y-AXIS value of the projector
Horizontal plane Y-axis Gravity direction
140
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Z-AXIS ������������������� Display the projector image at an angle of −100 – +100 degrees to the vertical in the Z-axis direction�
Z-AXIS value of the projector
Horizontal plane Z-axis
Gravity direction
[HDBaseT]
SIGNALQUALITY OPERATIONMODELINKSTATUS HDMISTATUS
141
❶ Mounting a lens (sold separately)Eightseparatebayonetstylelensescanbeusedwiththisprojector.ThedescriptionsherearefortheNP13ZL(2xzoom)lens.Mountotherlensesinthesamemanner.
WARNING:(1)Turnoffthepowerandwaitforthecoolingfantostop,(2)disconnectthepowercordandwaitfortheunittocoolbeforemountingorremovingthelens.Failuretodosocanresultineyeinjury,electricshock,orburninjuries.
Important:• Besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION]afterreplacingthelens.• Theprojectorandlensesaremadeofprecisionparts.Donotsubjectthemtoshockorexcessiveforces.• Removetheseparatelysoldlenswhenmovingtheprojector.Ifnot,thelenscouldbesubjecttoshockwhiletheprojectorisbeing
moved, damaging the lens and the lens shift mechanism.• Whendismountingthelensfromtheprojector,returnthelenspositiontothehomepositionbeforeturningoffthepower.Failure
to do so may prevent the lens from being mounted or dismounted because of narrow space between the projector and the lens.• Nevertouchthelenssurfacewhiletheprojectorisoperating.• Beverycarefulnottoletdirt,grease,etc.,onthelenssurfaceandnottoscratchthelenssurface.• Performtheseoperationsonaflatsurfaceoverapieceofcloth,etc.,topreventthelensfromgettingscratched.• Whenleavingthelensofftheprojectorforlongperiodsoftime,mountthedustcapontheprojectortopreventdustordirtfrom
getting inside.
Mounting the lens1.Removethedustcapfromtheprojector.
2.Removethelenscaponthebackofthelens.
NOTE: • Makesuretoremovethelenscapattheunitbackside.Ifthelensunit
with the lens cap remaining on is installed on the projector, it may cause of malfunction.
3.Aligntheprotrusiononthelenswiththeguidingnotchonthe projector lens hole and insert the lens.
NP11FL/NP30ZL/NP12ZL/NP13ZL/NP14ZL
Each protrusion is marked in yellow.
NP40ZL/NP41ZL/NP43ZL
The arrow mark in the label attached to the lens shows the position of protrusion.
Insert the lens slowly all the way in.
Guiding notch
Protrusion
6. Connecting to Other Equipment
142
6. Connecting to Other Equipment
4. Turnthelensclockwise.
Turn until a click is heard.
The lens is now fastened onto the projector.
TIP:MountingthelenstheftpreventionscrewFastenthelenstheftpreventionscrewincludedwiththeprojectortothebottom of the projector so that the lens cannot be removed easily.
Removing the lensPreparations:
1. Turn on the projector and display an image.
2. Press and hold the SHIFT/HOME POSITION button over 2 seconds.
The lens position will be moved to the home position.
3. Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the power cord.
4. Wait until the projector cabinet is cool enough to handle.
Ifthelenstheftpreventionscrewhasbeenseton,removeitfirst.
1.Whilepressing the lens releasebuttonat thebottomoflensmountingsectionontheprojector’sfrontpanelfullyin,turnthelenscounterclockwise.
The lens comes off.
NOTE: • Checkthefollowingareasifthelensunitcannotberemovedeven
when the lens release button is pressed.1. The lens release button may be locked sometimes. In that case,
turn the lens fully to the right. The lens release button lock will be released.
2. Slowly pull the lens off the projector.
• After removing the lens,mount the lenscaps (front andback) included with the lens before storing the lens.
• Ifnolensisgoingtobemountedontheprojector,mountthe dust cap included with the projector.
Make sure the direction to mount the dust cap to face the distinguish mark (△) on the cap upward.
143
6. Connecting to Other Equipment
❷ Making ConnectionsAcomputercable,HDMIcable,oraDisplayPortcablecanbeusedtoconnecttoacomputer.Theconnectioncableisnotenclosedwiththeprojector.Pleasegetreadyasuitablecablefortheconnection.
Analog RGB signal connection
• Connectthecomputercabletothemonitoroutterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputerandthecomputervideo input terminal on the projector. Please use a computer cable attached with a ferrite core.
• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.
InputconnectorINPUTbuttonontheprojector
cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol
COMPUTERIN 4:COMPUTER 4/COMPUTER
COMPUTER IN AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
Stereo mini-plug audio cable (not supplied)
NOTE: • Pleasechecktheoperatingmanualofthecomputeras
the name, position and direction of the terminal may differ depending on the computer.
Computer cable (sold commercially)
144
6. Connecting to Other Equipment
Digital RGB signal connection
• ConnectacommerciallyavailableHDMIcablebetweenthecomputer’sHDMIoutputconnectorandtheprojector’sHDMI1orHDMI2inputconnector.
• ConnectacommerciallyavailableDisplayPortcablebetweenthecomputer’sDisplayPortoutputconnectorandtheprojector’sDisplayPortinputconnector.
• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.
InputconnectorINPUTbuttonontheprojector
cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol
HDMI1IN 1:HDMI1 1/HDMI1
HDMI2IN 2:HDMI2 2/HDMI2
DisplayPortIN 3:DisplayPort 3/DisplayPort
Cautions when connecting an HDMI cable• UseacertifiedHighSpeedHDMI®CableorHighSpeedHDMI®CablewithEthernet.
Cautions when connecting a DisplayPort cable• UseacertifiedDisplayPortcable.
• Dependingonthecomputer,sometimemayberequireduntiltheimageisdisplayed.
• SomeDisplayPortcables(commerciallyavailable)havelocks.
• Todisconnectthecable,pressthebuttononthetopofthecable’sconnector,thenpullthecableout.
• PowercanbesuppliedtotheconnectingdevicefromtheDisplayPortinputterminal(maximumof1.65W).However,power will not be supplied to the computer.
• WhensignalsfromadevicethatusesasignalconverteradapterareconnectedtotheDisplayPortinputconnector,insomecasestheimagemaynotbedisplayed.
• WhentheHDMIoutputofacomputerisconnectedtotheDisplayPortinputconnector,useaconverter(commer-ciallyavailable).
HDMI 1 IN
HDMI 2 INDisplayPort IN
HDMI cable (not supplied)
DisplayPort cable (not supplied)
145
6. Connecting to Other Equipment
CautionswhenusingaDVIsignal• WhenthecomputerhasaDVIoutputconnector,useacommerciallyavailableconvertercable toconnect the
computertotheprojector’sHDMI1orHDMI2inputconnector(onlydigitalvideosignalscanbeinput).Also,con-nectthecomputer’saudiooutputtotheprojector’saudioinputconnector.Inthiscase,switchtheHDMI1orHDMI2settingaton-screenmenu’saudioselectionontheprojectorto[COMPUTER].(→page130)
Toconnectthecomputer’sDVIoutputconnectortotheprojector’sDisplayPortinputconnector,useacommerciallyavailable converter.
HDMI 1 INHDMI 2 IN AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
NOTE:WhenViewingaDVIDigitalSignal• Turnoffthepowerofthecomputerandprojectorbeforeconnecting.• Lowerthecomputer’svolumesettingbeforeconnectinganaudiocabletotheheadphonesconnector.Whenusingwithacomputer
connected to the projector, adjust the volume of both the projector and computer to set the appropriate volume level.• Ifthecomputerhasamini-jacktypeaudiooutputconnector,werecommendconnectingtheaudiocabletothatconnector.• Whenavideodeckisconnectedviaascanconverter,etc.,thedisplaymaynotbecorrectduringfast-forwardingandrewinding.• UseaDVI-to-HDMIcablecompliantwithDDWG(DigitalDisplayWorkingGroup)DVI(DigitalVisualInterface)revision1.0stan-dard.Thecableshouldbewithin197"/5mlong.
• TurnofftheprojectorandthePCbeforeconnectingtheDVI-to-HDMIcable.• ToprojectaDVIdigitalsignal:Connectthecables,turntheprojectoron,thenselecttheHDMIinput.Finally,turnonyourPC. Failuretodosomaynotactivatethedigitaloutputofthegraphicscardresultinginnopicturebeingdisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.
• SomegraphicscardshavebothanalogRGB(15-pinD-Sub)andDVI(orDFP)outputs.Useofthe15-pinD-Subconnectormayresult in no picture being displayed from the digital output of the graphics card.
• DonotdisconnecttheDVI-to-HDMIcablewhiletheprojector isrunning.If thesignalcablehasbeendisconnectedandthenreconnected,animagemaynotbecorrectlydisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.
• TheCOMPUTERvideoinputconnectorssupportWindowsPlugandPlay.• AMacsignaladapter(commerciallyavailable)mayberequiredtoconnectaMaccomputer. ToconnectaMaccomputerequippedwithaMiniDisplayPorttotheprojector,useacommerciallyavailableMiniDisplayPort→ DisplayPortconvertercable.
146
6. Connecting to Other Equipment
Connecting Component Input
• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.
InputconnectorINPUTbuttonontheprojector
cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol
COMPUTERIN 4:COMPUTER 4/COMPUTER
NOTE:• Whenthesignalformatissetto[AUTO](defaultfactorysettingwhenshipped),thecomputersignalandcomponentsignalareautomatically distinguished and switched. If the signals cannot bedistinguished, select [COMPONENT]under [ADJUST]→ [VIDEO]→[SIGNALTYPE]intheon-screenmenuoftheprojector.
• ToconnecttoavideodevicewithaDconnector,usethesoldseparatelyDconnectorconverteradapter(modelADP-DT1E).
COMPUTER IN
15-pin - to - RCA (female) × 3 cable adapter (ADP-CV1E)
Stereo mini plug - to - RCA audio cable (not supplied)
Component video RCA × 3 cable (not supplied)
Blu-ray player
Audio Equipment
147
6. Connecting to Other Equipment
Connecting HDMI InputYoucanconnecttheHDMIoutputofyourBlu-rayplayer,harddiskplayer,ornotebooktypePCtotheHDMI1INorHDMI2INconnectorofyourprojector.
InputconnectorINPUTbuttonontheprojector
cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol
HDMI1IN 1:HDMI1 1/HDMI1
HDMI2IN 2:HDMI2 2/HDMI2
TIP:ForusersofaudiovideoequipmentwithanHDMIconnector:Select“Enhanced”ratherthan“Normal”ifHDMIoutputisswitchablebetween“Enhanced”and“Normal”.This will provide improved image contrast and more detailed dark areas.Formoreinformationonsettings,refertotheinstructionmanualoftheaudiovideoequipmenttobeconnected.
• WhenconnectingtheHDMI1INorHDMI2INconnectoroftheprojectortotheBlu-rayplayer,theprojector’svideolevelcanbemadesettingsinaccordancewiththeBlu-rayplayer’svideolevel.Inthemenuselect[ADJUST]→ [VIDEO]→[VIDEOLEVEL]andmakenecessarysettings.
• IftheHDMIinput’ssoundisnotoutput,checkif[HDMI1]and[HDMI2]areset[HDMI1]and[HDMI2]correctlytheon-screenmenu[SETUP]→[SOURCEOPTIONS]→[AUDIOSELECT].(→page130)
HDMI 1 IN HDMI 2 IN
AUDIO OUT
Audio cable (not supplied)
HDMI cable (not supplied)Use High Speed HDMI® Cable.
148
6. Connecting to Other Equipment
Connecting to a HDBaseT transmission device (sold commercially)UseaLANcablesoldcommerciallytoconnecttheHDBaseTIN/Ethernetportoftheprojector(RJ-45)toaHDBaseTtransmission device sold commercially.TheHDBaseTIN/EthernetportoftheprojectorsupportsHDMIsignals(HDCP)fromtransmissiondevices,controlsignalsfromexternaldevices(serial,LAN)andremotecontrolsignals(IRcommands).• Refertotheowner’smanualaccompaniedwithyourHDBaseTtransmissionforconnectingwithyourexternalde-
vices.
Connection example
RS-232CLAN AUDIO IN HDMI INWired-Remote
DC INHDBaseT
COMPUTER IN
HDBaseT IN/Ethernet
Computer (for control use)Computer (for output use)
Example of a transmission device
Our company’s remote control (RD-465E)
HDMI output video device
NOTE:• Pleaseuseashieldedtwistedpair(STP)cableofCategory5eorhigherfortheLANcable(soldcommercially).• ThemaximumtransmissiondistanceovertheLANcableis100m.(themaximumdistanceis70mfora4Ksignal)• Pleasedonotuseothertransmissionequipmentbetweentheprojectorandtransmissionequipment.Thepicturequalitymaybe
degraded as a result.• ThisprojectorisnotguaranteedtoworkwithallHDBaseTtransmissiondevicessoldcommercially.
149
6. Connecting to Other Equipment
Connecting several projectors ItenablestoprojectHDMI,DisplayPort,HDBaseTimageonseveralprojectorsconnectingtheHDBaseTIN/EthernetportandtheHDBaseTOUT/EthernetportbyLANcable.Theprojectorssupportsamebrightnessandresolutioncanbeconnecteduptofourunits,
HDBaseT OUT/Ethernet
HDBaseT IN/Ethernet
• ThesignalfromtheCOMPUTERINterminalisnotoutputfromtheHDBaseTOUT/Ethernetportofthisprojector.
• Projectorsofwhichbrightnessandresolutionaredifferent,thesecannotbeconnectedeveniftheseareinsameseries.Atthesametime,thisprojectorisnotguaranteedtoworkcorrectlyintheconnectionwithanotherdeviceas a monitor.
• WhenoutputtingHDMIsignals,turnonthepowerofthevideodeviceontheoutputsideandkeepitconnectedbeforeinputtingvideosignalsintothisdevice.TheHDMIoutputterminalsoftheprojectorareequippedwithrepeaterfunctions.WhenadeviceisconnectedtotheHDMIoutputterminal,theresolutionoftheoutputsignalislimitedbythe resolution supported by the connected device.
• ConnectinganddisconnectinganHDMIcableorselectinganotherinputsourceonthesecondandsubsequentprojectorswilldisabletheHDMIrepeaterfunction.
Master projector
Other projector
150
6. Connecting to Other Equipment
Portrait projection (vertical orientation)Portraitscreensfromacomputercanbeprojectedbyinstallingtheprojec-torinaverticalorientation.Angletodisplayallthescreenssuchastheon-screenmenucanbechangedbythemenu[SETUP]→[MENU(2)]→[MENUANGLE].
Precautions during installation• Pleasedonotinstalltheprojectorinaverticalorientationontopofthefloorortableonitsown.Theintakevent
maybeobstructed,resultingintheprojectorgettingwarmandthepossibilityoffireandmalfunctionoccurring.
• Forverticalinstallation,installtheprojectorwiththeintakevent(filter)facingdownwards.Astandforsupportingtheprojectorneedstobemadeforthispurpose.Inthiscase,thestandmustbedesignedsuchthatthecenterofgravityoftheprojectorislocatedwellwithinthelegsofthestand.Ifnot,theprojectormayfalloverandresultininjury,damageandmalfunction.
Design and manufacturing conditions for the standPleaseengageaninstallationserviceproviderforthedesignandmanufactureofthecustomizedstandtobeusedforportraitprojection.Pleaseensurethatthefollowingarecompliedwithwhendesigningthestand.1. Maintainanopeningofatleast315×150mmsoasnottoobstructtheintakevent/filteroftheprojector.
2. Maintainadistanceofatleast130mmbetweentheprojectorintakeventandthefloor(fortheopeningofthefiltercover).
3. Usethefourscrewholesatthebackoftheprojectortosecureittothestand.
Screwholecenterdimension:200×250mm
Screwholedimensionontheprojector:M4withamaximumdepthof8mm.
* Pleasedesignthestandsuchthattherearlegsatthebackoftheprojectordonotcontactthestand.Thefrontlegscanbeturnedandremoved.
4. Horizontaladjustmentmechanism(forexample,boltsandnutsinfourlocations)
5. Pleasedesignthestandsuchthatitdoesnottoppleovereasily.
151
6. Connecting to Other Equipment
Reference drawings* Thedrawingshowingthedimensionalrequirementsisnotanactualstanddesigndrawing.
[Side View] [Front View]
Screw holes for 4 - M4 use
Tilt foot (remove)
130 or greater
200
Filter cover (when opened)
Horizontal adjuster
[Bottom View]
Filter cover
315 or greater
Rear foot
152
6. Connecting to Other Equipment
Connecting to a Wired LANTheprojectorcomesstandardwithaLANport(RJ-45)whichprovidesaLANconnectionusingaLANcable.TouseaLANconnection,youarerequiredtosettheLANontheprojectormenu.Select[SETUP]→[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIREDLAN].(→page126).
Example of LAN connectionExampleofwiredLANconnection
LAN
Server
Hub
LAN cable (not supplied)
NOTE:UseaCategory5orhigherLANcable.
153
7. MaintenanceThissectiondescribesthesimplemaintenanceproceduresyoushouldfollowtocleanthefilters,thelens,thecabinet,andtoreplacethelampandthefilters.
❶ Cleaning the FiltersThefilterattheintakeventkeepsdustanddirtfromgettinginsidetheprojector.Ifthefilterisdirtyorclogged,yourprojector may overheat.
WARNING• Pleasedonotuseaspraycontainingflammablegastoremovedustattachedtothefilters,etc.Doingsomay
resultinfires.
NOTE:Themessageforfiltercleaningwillbedisplayedforoneminuteaftertheprojectoristurnedonoroff.Whenthemessageisdisplayed,cleanthefilters.Thetimetocleanthefiltersissetto[OFF]attimeofshipment.(→ page 112)To cancel the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.
Tocleanthefilter,detachthefilterunitandthefiltercover.
CAUTION• Beforecleaningthefilters,turnofftheprojector,disconnectthepowercordandthenallowthecabinettocool.
Failuretodosocanresultinelectricshockorburninjuries.
1. Press down two buttons and then pull the filter cover towards you to open it.
Filter cover Button
2.Pickthecenterofthefilterunitforpullingitout.
Filter unit
154
7. Maintenance
3. Vacuumdustonthefrontandbackfacesofthefilterunit.
• Getridofdustinthefilter.
• Gentlygetridofdustonthefiltercoverandintheaccordionpleats of the filter.
NOTE: • Wheneveryouvacuumthefilter,usethesoftbrushattachmentto
vacuum. This is to avoid damage to the filter.• Donotwashthefilterwithwater.Doingsocanresultinfilterclog-
ging.
Filter unitFilter cover
4.Mountthefilterunitbackontotheprojectorcabinet.
Insert the filter unit onto the projector aligning the two protru-sions on each top and bottom of the filter unit to the grooves on the projector cabinet.
Protrusion
Groove
5.Closethefiltercover.
Keep to push the filter cover frame around the buttons until a “click” sound is heard. The filter cover will be secured in position.
Button
6.Clearthefilterusagehours.
Plug the power cord into the wall outlet, and then turn on the projector.
From the menu, select [RESET] → [CLEAR FILTER HOURS]. (→ page 135)
The interval time to clean the filters is set to [OFF] at time of shipment. When using the projector as it is, you do not clear the filter usage
155
7. Maintenance
❷ Cleaning the Lens• Turnofftheprojectorbeforecleaning.
• Theprojectorhasaplasticlens.Useacommerciallyavailableplasticlenscleaner.
• Donotscratchormarthelenssurfaceasaplasticlensiseasilyscratched.
• Neverusealcoholorglasslenscleanerasdoingsowillcausedamagetotheplasticlenssurface.
WARNING• Pleasedonotuseaspraycontainingflammablegastoremovedustattachedtothelens,etc.Doingsomay
resultinfires.
❸ Cleaning the CabinetTurnofftheprojector,andunplugtheprojectorbeforecleaning.• Useadrysoftclothtowipedustoffthecabinet.
Ifheavilysoiled,useamilddetergent.
• Neverusestrongdetergentsorsolventssuchasalcoholorthinner.
• Whencleaningtheventilationslitsorthespeakerusingavacuumcleaner,donotforcethebrushofthevacuumcleaner into the slits of the cabinet.
Vacuum the dust off the ventilation slits.
• Cloggedventilationslitsmaycauseariseintheinternaltemperatureoftheprojector,resultinginmalfunction.
• Donotscratchorhitthecabinetwithyourfingersoranyhardobjects
• Contactyourdealerforcleaningtheinsideoftheprojector.
NOTE:Donotapplyvolatileagentsuchasinsecticideonthecabinet,thelens,orthescreen.Donotleavearubberorvinylproductin prolonged contact with it. Otherwise the surface finish will be deteriorated or the coating may be stripped off.
156
7. Maintenance
❹ Replacing the LampWhenthelampreachestheendofitslife,theLAMPindicatoronthecabinetwillblinkinorangeandthemessage“THELAMPHASREACHEDTHEENDOFITSUSABLELIFE.PLEASEREPLACETHELAMP.USETHESPECIFIEDLAMPFORSAFETYANDPERFORMANCE.”willappear(*).Eventhoughthelampmaystillbeworking,replacethelamptomaintaintheoptimalprojectorperformanceassoonaspossible.Afterreplacingthelamp,besuretoclearthe lamp hour meter. (→page134)
CAUTION• DONOTTOUCHTHELAMPimmediatelyafterithasbeenused.Itwillbeextremelyhot.Turntheprojectoroff
andthendisconnectthepowercord.Allowatleastonehourforthelamptocoolbeforehandling.
• Usethespecifiedlampforsafetyandperformance.
• DONOTREMOVEANYSCREWSexceptonelampcoverscrewandtwolamphousingscrews.Youcouldreceiveanelectricshock.
• Donotbreaktheglassonthelamphousing.
Keepfingerprintsofftheglasssurfaceonthelamphousing.Leavingfingerprintsontheglasssurfacemightcauseanunwantedshadowandpoorpicturequality.
• ThebarindicatorastheLAMPLIFEREMAININGshowsthepercentageofremainingbulblife.
Whentheremaininglamptimereaches0%,theLAMPLIFEREMAININGbarindicatorchangesfrom0%to100Hoursasthegraceperiodforreplacinglampandstartscountingdown.Inthegraceperiod,theLAMPindicatorwillblinkinorange.
Whenitreaches0hours,theLAMPindicatorwillstartblinkinginred.
Ifyoucontinuetousethelampafterthelampreachestheendofitslife,thelampbulbmayshatter,andpiecesofglassmaybescatteredinthelampcase.Donottouchthemasthepiecesofglassmaycauseinjury.Ifthishap-pens,contactyourNECdealerforlampreplacement.
*NOTE: This message will be displayed under the following conditions:• foroneminuteaftertheprojectorhasbeenpoweredon• whenthe (POWER)buttonontheprojectorcabinetortheSTANDBYbuttonontheremotecontrolispressed
To turn off the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control.
Optionallampandtoolsneededforreplacement:
• Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)
• Replacementlamp: NP42LP
Flow of Replacing the Lamp
Step 1. Replacethelamp
Step 2. Clearthelampusagehours(→page134, 135)
157
7. Maintenance
To replace the lamp: 1.Removethelampcover.
(1) Loosen the lamp cover screw
• Thelampcoverscrewisnotremovable.
(2) Pull the bottom of the lamp cover towards you and remove it.
2.Removethelamphousing.
(1) Loosen the two screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling condi-tion.
• Thetwoscrewsarenotremovable.
• Thereisaninterlockonthiscasetopreventtheriskofelectricalshock.Donotattempttocircumventthisinterlock.
(2) Remove the lamp housing by holding it.
CAUTION:Makesurethatthelamphousingiscoolenoughtobeforeremovingit.
Interlock
158
7. Maintenance
3. Installanewlamphousing.
(1) Insert a new lamp housing gently.
(2) Secure it in place with the two screws.
• Besuretotightenthescrews.
4.Reattachthelampcover.
(1) Insert the top edge of the lamp cover into the groove in the projector and close the lamp cover.
(2) Tighten the screw to secure the lamp cover.
• Besuretotightenthescrew.
This completes the lamp replacement.Go on to clear the lamp usage hours.
159
7. Maintenance
To clear the lamp usage hours:1. Place the projector where you use it.
2.Plugthepowercordintothewalloutlet,andthenturnontheprojector.
3.Clearthelampusagehours.
From the menu, select [RESET] → [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] and reset the lamp usage hours. (→ page 134)
160
7. Maintenance
❺ Replacing the filtersReplacethefilterevery10000usedhours.Usabletimeofthefilterisvariesdependsontheprojectorinstallationcircumstances.Ifyourprojectorisinstalledindustycircumstance,recommendtoreplacethefilterearlierthan10000hours.• Thereplacementfilter,NP06FT,isavailableatourdealers.
NOTE:• DONOTTOUCHTHEFILTERUNITimmediatelyaftertheprojectorhasbeenused.Turntheprojectoroffandthendisconnectthe
power cord and leave the projector cooled down enough.• Timeforreplacingthefilterisvarydependsontheoperationcircumstances.
Toreplacethefilters:
NOTE: • Beforereplacingthefilters,wipeoffdustanddirtfromtheprojectorcabinet.• Theprojectorisprecisionequipment.Keepoutdustanddirtduringfilterreplacement.• Donotwashthefilterswithsoapandwater.Soapandwaterwilldamagethefiltermembrane.• Putfiltersintoplace.Incorrectattachmentofafiltermaycausedustanddirttogetintotheinsideoftheprojector.
1. Press down two buttons and then pull the filter cover towards you to open it.
Filter cover Button
2.Pickthecenterofthefilterunitforpullingitout.
Filter unit
3.Removedustfromthefiltercover.
Clean both outside and inside.
4. Attach a new filter into the filter unit.
Filter cover
161
7. Maintenance
5.Mountthefilterunitbackontotheprojectorcabinet.
Insert the filter unit onto the projector aligning the two protru-sions on each top and bottom of the filter unit to the groove on the projector cabinet.
Protrusion
Groove
6.Closethefiltercover.
Keep to push the filter cover frame around the buttons until a “click” sound is heard. The filter cover will be secured in position.
Button
Thiscompletesthefilterreplacement.Goontoclearthefilterhours.
Toclearthefilterhours:1. Place the projector where you use it.
2.Plugthepowercordintothewalloutlet,andthenturnontheprojector.
3.Clearthefilterhours.
From the menu, select [RESET] → [CLEAR FILTER HOURS] and reset the filter usage hours. (→ page 135)
162
8. Appendix
❶ Throw distance and screen sizeEightseparatebayonetstylelensescanbeusedonthisprojector.Refertotheinformationonthispageandusealenssuitedfortheinstallationenvironment(screensizeandthrowdistance).Forinstructionsonmountingthelens,seepage141.
Lens types and throw distance
WUXGAType(Unit:m)
Screensize(inches)
LensmodelnameNP11FL NP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL
30 - - 0.7-0.9 0.9-1.9 - - - -40 0.7 - 1.0-1.3 1.2-2.5 - - - -50 0.8 0.8-1.1 1.2-1.6 1.6-3.1 - 0.8-1.2 1.4-3.2 3.3-6.460 1.0 1.0-1.3 1.5-1.9 1.9-3.8 3.7-6.0 1.0-1.4 1.7-3.9 3.9-7.780 1.4 1.4-1.8 2.0-2.6 2.5-5.1 5.0-8.0 1.4-1.9 2.2-5.2 5.2-10.2100 1.7 1.7-2.2 2.5-3.3 3.2-6.3 6.3-10.1 1.7-2.4 2.8-6.5 6.4-12.8120 2.1 2.0-2.7 3.0-3.9 3.8-7.6 7.5-12.1 2.0-2.9 3.4-7.8 7.7-15.3150 2.6 2.6-3.4 3.8-4.9 4.8-9.5 9.4-15.2 2.6-3.6 4.2-9.8 9.6-19.1200 - 3.4-4.5 5.1-6.6 6.4-12.7 12.6-20.3 3.4-4.8 5.7-13.0 12.7-25.4240 - 4.1-5.4 6.1-7.9 7.6-15.3 15.2-24.4 4.1-5.8 6.8-15.6 15.3-30.5300 - 5.2-6.8 7.6-9.9 9.6-19.1 19.0-30.5 5.2-7.3 8.5-19.6 19.1-38.1400 - 6.9-9.0 10.2-13.2 12.8-25.5 25.4-40.7 6.9-9.7 11.4-26.1 25.4-50.8500 - 8.7-11.3 12.7-16.5 16.0-31.9 31.8-50.9 8.6-12.1 14.2-32.6 31.7-63.4
(Unit:inches)
Screensize(inches)
LensmodelnameNP11FL NP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL
30 - - 28-37 36-74 - - - -40 26 - 38-50 48-99 - - - -50 33 33-43 48-64 61-124 - 33-46 54-127 129-25460 40 40-52 59-77 74-149 146-236 40-56 66-153 154-30380 53 53-70 79-103 99-200 196-317 53-75 88-204 204-403100 67 67-88 99-129 124-250 246-397 67-94 110-256 254-503120 81 81-106 119-155 149-300 296-477 81-113 133-307 303-602150 101 101-132 149-194 187-376 372-598 101-142 166-384 378-752200 - 135-177 199-259 250-502 497-799 135-190 223-513 502-1001240 - 163-213 239-312 301-602 598-959 163-229 267-616 601-1201300 - 204-267 300-390 377-754 748-1200 204-286 335-770 750-1500400 - 272-356 400-521 503-1005 1000-1602 272-382 447-1028 999-1998500 - 341-445 501-651 629-1257 1251-2004 340-478 559-1285 1247-2497
TIPCalculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensizeNP11FLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8:26"/0.7m(min.)to101"/2.6m(max.)NP30ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8toH×1.0:33"/0.8m(min.)to445"/11.3m(max.)NP12ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.2toH×1.5:28"/0.7m(min.)to651"/16.5m(max.)NP13ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.5toH×3.0:36"/0.9m(min.)to1257"/31.9m(max.)NP14ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×2.9toH×4.7:146"/3.7m(min.)to2004"/50.9m(max.)NP40ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8toH×1.1:33"/0.8m(min.)to478"/12.1m(max.)NP41ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.3toH×3.0:54"/1.4m(min.)to1285"/32.6m(max.)NP43ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×3.0toH×5.9:129"/3.3m(min.)to2497"/63.4m(max.)“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenusingtheNP13ZLlens:Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→ page 166),H(screenwidth)=127"/323.1cm.Thethrowdistanceis127"/323.1cm×1.5to127"/323.1cm×3.0=191"/484.7cmto381"/969.3cm(becauseofthezoomlens).
163
8. Appendix
WXGAType(Unit:m)
Screensize(inches)
LensmodelnameNP11FL NP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL
30 - - 0.7-1.0 0.9-1.9 - - - -40 0.7 - 1.0-1.3 1.2-2.5 - - - -50 0.8 0.8-1.1 1.2-1.6 1.6-3.2 - 0.8-1.2 1.4-3.2 3.3-6.560 1.0 1.0-1.3 1.5-2.0 1.9-3.8 3.7-6.0 1.0-1.4 1.7-3.9 3.9-7.780 1.4 1.4-1.8 2.0-2.6 2.5-5.1 5.0-8.1 1.4-1.9 2.2-5.2 5.2-10.3100 1.7 1.7-2.2 2.5-3.3 3.2-6.4 6.3-10.1 1.7-2.4 2.8-6.5 6.5-12.8120 2.1 2.0-2.7 3.0-4.0 3.8-7.7 7.6-12.2 2.1-2.9 3.4-7.8 7.7-15.4150 2.6 2.6-3.4 3.8-5.0 4.8-9.6 9.5-15.3 2.6-3.6 4.3-9.8 9.6-19.2200 - 3.4-4.5 5.1-6.6 6.4-12.8 12.7-20.4 3.4-4.9 5.7-13.1 12.8-25.5240 - 4.1-5.4 6.1-8.0 7.7-15.4 15.3-24.5 4.1-5.8 6.8-15.7 15.3-30.6300 - 5.2-6.8 7.7-10.0 9.6-19.2 19.1-30.7 5.2-7.3 8.6-19.6 19.1-38.2400 - 6.9-9.0 10.2-13.3 12.8-25.7 25.5-40.9 6.9-9.7 11.4-26.2 25.5-51.0500 - 8.7-11.3 12.8-16.7 16.0-32.1 31.9-51.2 8.7-12.2 14.3-32.8 31.8-63.7
(Unit:inches)
Screensize(inches)
LensmodelnameNP11FL NP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL
30 - - 29-38 36-74 - - - -40 26 - 39-51 49-99 - - - -50 33 33-43 49-64 61-125 - 33-47 55-128 130-25560 40 40-52 59-77 74-150 147-238 40-56 66-153 155-30580 53 53-70 79-103 99-201 197-318 53-75 88-205 205-405100 67 67-88 99-130 125-251 248-399 67-95 111-257 255-505120 81 81-106 120-156 150-302 298-480 81-114 134-308 304-605150 101 101-132 150-195 188-378 374-601 101-143 167-386 379-755200 - 135-177 201-261 252-504 500-803 136-191 224-515 504-1005240 - 163-213 241-314 302-606 601-965 163-230 269-618 604-1205300 - 204-267 302-393 378-757 752-1207 204-287 337-773 753-1506400 - 272-356 403-524 505-1011 1005-1611 273-384 449-1031 1003-2006500 - 341-445 504-656 632-1264 1257-2015 342-480 562-1289 1252-2507
TIPCalculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensizeNP11FLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8:26"/0.7m(min.)to102"/2.6m(max.)NP30ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8toH×1.0:33"/0.8m(min.)to445"/11.3m(max.)NP12ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.2toH×1.5:29"/0.7m(min.)to656"/16.7m(max.)NP13ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.5toH×3.0:36"/0.9m(min.)to1264"/32.1m(max.)NP14ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×2.9toH×4.7:147"/3.7m(min.)to2015"/51.2m(max.)NP40ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8toH×1.1:33"/0.8m(min.)to480"/12.2m(max.)NP41ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.3toH×3.0:55"/1.4m(min.)to1289"/32.8m(max.)NP43ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×3.0toH×6.0:130"/3.3m(min.)to2507"/63.7m(max.)“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenusingtheNP13ZLlens:Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→ page 166),H(screenwidth)=127"/323.1cm.Thethrowdistanceis127"/323.1cm×1.5to127"/323.1cm×3.0=191"/484.7cmto381"/969.3cm(becauseofthezoomlens).
164
8. Appendix
XGAType(Unit:m)
Screensize(inches)
LensmodelnameNP11FL NP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL
30 - - 0.7-0.9 0.9-1.8 - - - -40 0.6 - 0.9-1.2 1.2-2.4 - - - -50 0.8 0.8-1.1 1.2-1.6 1.5-3.0 - 0.8-1.1 1.3-3.1 3.2-6.260 1.0 1.0-1.3 1.4-1.9 1.8-3.7 3.6-5.8 1.0-1.4 1.6-3.7 3.8-7.480 1.3 1.3-1.7 1.9-2.5 2.4-4.9 4.8-7.8 1.3-1.8 2.2-5.0 5.0-9.9100 1.6 1.6-2.1 2.4-3.2 3.0-6.1 6.0-9.7 1.6-2.3 2.7-6.3 6.2-12.3120 2.0 2.0-2.6 2.9-3.8 3.7-7.4 7.3-11.7 2.0-2.8 3.3-7.5 7.4-14.8150 2.5 2.5-3.2 3.7-4.8 4.6-9.2 9.1-14.7 2.5-3.5 4.1-9.4 9.3-18.4160 2.7200 - 3.3-4.3 4.9-6.4 6.1-12.3 12.2-19.6 3.3-4.7 5.5-12.5 12.3-24.5240 - 4.0-5.2 5.9-7.7 7.4-14.8 14.7-23.6 4.0-5.6 6.6-15.1 14.7-29.4300 - 5.0-6.5 7.4-9.6 9.2-18.5 18.4-29.5 5.0-7.0 8.2-18.8 18.4-36.7400 - 6.7-8.7 9.8-12.8 12.3-24.7 24.5-39.3 6.7-9.4 11.0-25.1 24.5-48.9500 - 8.4-10.9 12.3-16.0 15.4-30.9 30.7-49.2 8.3-11.7 13.7-31.4 30.5-61.1
(Unit:inches)
Screensize(inches)
LensmodelnameNP11FL NP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL
30 - - 27-36 35-71 - - - -40 26 - 37-49 47-95 - - - -50 33 31-42 47-61 59-120 - 31-45 52-122 125-24560 40 38-50 56-74 71-144 141-228 38-54 63-147 149-29380 53 51-67 76-99 96-193 189-306 51-72 85-197 197-389100 67 65-85 95-125 120-242 238-384 64-91 107-246 245-485120 81 78-102 115-150 144-290 286-461 78-109 128-296 292-581150 101 98-128 144-188 181-363 359-578 97-137 161-370 364-725160 105200 - 131-171 193-251 242-485 481-772 130-183 215-494 484-965240 - 157-205 231-301 291-582 578-927 157-220 258-593 580-1157300 - 197-257 290-377 364-728 723-1160 196-276 323-742 723-1446400 - 263-343 387-503 486-972 966-1549 262-368 432-989 963-1926500 - 329-430 484-630 608-1215 1209-1937 328-461 540-1237 1202-2407
TIPCalculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensizeNP11FLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8:25"/0.6m(min.)to105"/2.7m(max.)NP30ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8toH×1.1:31"/0.8m(min.)to430"/10.9m(max.)NP12ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.2toH×1.6:27"/0.7m(min.)to484"/16.0m(max.)NP13ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.5toH×3.0:35"/0.9m(min.)to1215"/30.9m(max.)NP14ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×3.0toH×4.8:141"/3.6m(min.)to1937"/49.2m(max.)NP40ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×0.8toH×1.1:31"/0.8m(min.)to461"/11.7m(max.)NP41ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×1.3toH×3.1:52"/1.3m(min.)to1237"/31.4m(max.)NP43ZLlensthrowdistance(inch/m)=H×3.1toH×6.1:125"/3.2m(min.)to2407"/61.1m(max.)“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenusingtheNP13ZLlens:Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→ page 166),H(screenwidth)=120"/304.8cm.Thethrowdistanceis120"/304.8cm×1.5to120"/304.8cm×3.0=180"/457.2cmto360"/914.4cm(becauseofthezoomlens).
165
8. Appendix
Projection range for the different lenses
NP12ZL
NP11FL
NP30ZL
NP14ZL
NP43ZL
NP41ZL
NP40ZL
NP13ZL
40-150" 30-500"
50-500"
50-500"30-500" 50-500" 50-500"60-500"
WUXGAType:26"-101"/0.7–2.6mWXGAType:26"-102"/0.7–2.6mXGAType:0.6–2.7m(max.160")
WUXGAType:33"-445"/0.8–11.3mWXGAType:33"-445"/0.8–11.3mXGAType:31"-430"/0.8–10.9m
WUXGAType:28"-651"/0.7–16.5mWXGAType:29"-656"/0.7–16.7mXGAType:27"-630"/0.7–16.0m
WUXGAType:36"-1257"/0.9-31.9mWXGAType:36"-1264"/0.9–32.1mXGAType:35"-1215"/0.9-30.9m
WUXGAType:33"-478"/0.8-12.1mWXGAType:33"-480"/0.8-12.2mXGAType:31"-461"/0.8-11.7m
WUXGAType:54"-1285"/1.4-32.6mWXGAType:55"-1289"/1.4-32.8mXGAType:52"-1237"/1.3-31.4m
WUXGAType:146"-2004"/3.7–50.9mWXGAType:147"-2015"/3.7–51.2mXGAType:141"-1937"/3.6–49.2m
WUXGAType:129"-2497"/3.3-63.4mWXGAType:130"-2507"/3.3-63.7mXGAType:125"-2407"/3.2-61.1m
Motorizedzoom/Motorizedfocus
Manualzoom/Manualfocus
Manual focus
166
8. Appendix
Tables of screen sizes and dimensions
WUXGAType/WXGAType
Screen height
Screen width
16:10 screen size (di-agonal)
Size(inches) Screenwidth Screenheight(inches) (cm) (inches) (cm)
30 25 64.6 16 40.440 34 86.2 21 53.850 42 107.7 26 67.360 51 129.2 32 80.880 68 172.3 42 107.7100 85 215.4 53 134.6120 102 258.5 64 161.5150 127 323.1 79 201.9200 170 430.8 106 269.2240 204 516.9 127 323.1300 254 646.2 159 403.9400 339 861.6 212 538.5500 424 1077.0 265 673.1
XGAType
Screen height
Screen width
4:3 screen size (di-agonal)
Size(inches) Screenwidth Screenheight(inches) (cm) (inches) (cm)
30 24 61.0 18 45.740 32 81.3 24 61.050 40 101.6 30 76.260 48 121.9 36 91.480 64 162.6 48 121.9100 80 203.2 60 152.4120 96 243.8 72 182.9150 120 304.8 90 228.6160 128 325.1 96 243.8200 160 406.4 120 304.8240 192 487.7 144 365.8300 240 609.6 180 457.2400 320 812.8 240 609.6500 400 1016.0 300 762.0
167
8. Appendix
Lens shifting rangeThisprojectorisequippedwithalensshiftfunctionforadjustingthepositionoftheprojectedimagebybuttons.Thelenscanbeshiftedwithintherangeshownbelow.
NOTE: • UseNP11FLatthehomeposition.
* Refertothelensshifttableonthenextpageforthedrawingnumberofthelensshiftrange.
Desk/front projection
100%V
100%H
1
23 4
10%H 10%H
Width of projected image
Height of projected image
Descriptionofsymbols:Vindicatesvertical(heightoftheprojectedimage),Hindicateshorizontal(widthofthepro-jectedimage).
Ceiling/front projector
100%V
100%H
10%H 10%H
1
2
3 4
Height of projected image
Width of projected image
168
8. Appendix
Lens shift tableApplicable
typeDrawingnumber
LensunitNP30ZL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP40ZL NP41ZL NP43ZL
WUXGAType ① 50%V 50%V 50%V 50%V 50%V 50%V 50%V② 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V③ 20%H 30%H 30%H* 30%H 20%H 20%H 20%H④ 20%H 30%H 30%H* 30%H 20%H 20%H 20%H
WXGAType ① 50%V 60%V 60%V 60%V 50%V 50%V 50%V② 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V③ 20%H 30%H 30%H 30%H 20%H 20%H 20%H④ 20%H 30%H 30%H 30%H 20%H 20%H 20%H
XGAType ① 35%V 50%V 50%V 50%V 35%V 35%V 35%V② 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V 10%V③ 20%H 30%H 30%H 30%H 20%H 20%H 20%H④ 20%H 30%H 30%H 30%H 20%H 20%H 20%H
* ForWUXGAType,theshiftrangeinthehorizontaldirectionisupto15%Hwhenusingthelensunit“NP13ZL”toprojectascreenexceedingModel150.
Ex.:Whenprojectingona150"screenTheexplanationisforaXGATypeprojector(4:3panel)withaNP12ZLlensfitted.• PleasereplacethescreendimensionsandmaximumshiftvalueinthecalculationsfortheWXGATypeandWUXGATypeprojectors(16:10panel)aswell.
Accordingtothetablesofscreensizesanddimensions(→page166),H=120"(304.8cm),V=90"(228.6cm).Adjustmentrange in theverticaldirection:Theprojected imagecanbemovedupwards0.5×90"(228.6cm)=45"(114cm),,downwards0.1×90"(228.6cm)=9"(22cm)(whenthe lens isat thecenterposition).Foraceiling/frontinstallation,theabovefiguresareinverted.Adjustmentrangeinthehorizontaldirection:Theprojectedimagecanbemovedtotheleft0.3×120"(304.8cm)=36"(91cm),totheright0.3×120"(304.8cm)=36"(91cm).*Figuresdifferbyseveral%becausethecalculationisapproximate.
169
8. Appendix
❷ Compatible Input Signal List
HDMI/HDBaseTSignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)
VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60/72/75/85/iMacSVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 56/60/72/75/85/iMacXGA 1024 × 768 *1 4 : 3 60/70/75/85/iMacHD 1280 × 720 *2 16 : 9 60
WXGA 1280 × 768 *2 15 : 9 601280 × 800 *2 16 : 10 60
Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60
FWXGA 1360 × 768 16 : 9 601366 × 768 16 : 9 60
SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *3 4 : 3 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *3 16 : 9 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *3 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60WQHD iMac27"
2560 × 1440 16 : 9 60
WQXGA 2560 × 1600 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)
4K 3840 × 2160 16 : 9 24/25/30/50/604096 × 2160 17 : 9 24/25/30/50/60
HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 *3 16 : 9 24/25/30/50/60HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 *3 16 : 9 48/50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 *2 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480p) 720/1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576p) 720/1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50SDTV(480i) 1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i) 1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
DisplayPortSignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)
VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60XGA 1024 × 768 *1 4 : 3 60HD 1280 × 720 *2 16 : 9 60
WXGA 1280 × 768 *2 15 : 9 601280 × 800 *2 16 : 10 60
Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60
FWXGA 1360 × 768 16 : 9 601366 × 768 16 : 9 60
SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *3 4 : 3 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *3 16 : 9 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *3 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60WQHD iMac27"
2560 × 1440 16 : 9 60
WQXGA 2560 × 1600 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)
4K 3840 × 2160 16 : 9 24/25/304096 × 2160 17 : 9 24/25/30
HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 24/25/30/50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480i/p) 720/1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i/p) 720/1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
170
8. Appendix
Analog RGBSignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)
VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60/72/75/85/iMacSVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 56/60/72/75/85/iMacXGA 1024 × 768 *1 4 : 3 60/70/75/85/iMacXGA+ 1152 × 864 4 : 3 75HD 1280 × 720 *2 16 : 9 60
WXGA 1280 × 768 *2 15 : 9 60/75/851280 × 800 *2 16 : 10 60/75/85
Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60/85SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60/75/85
FWXGA 1360 × 768 16 : 9 601366 × 768 16 : 9 60
SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60/75WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60/75/85WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *3 4 : 3 60WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60FillHD 1920 × 1080 *3 16 : 9 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *3 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *3 16 : 9 60MAC13" 640 × 480 4 : 3 67MAC16" 832 × 624 4 : 3 75MAC19" 1024 × 768 *1 4 : 3 75MAC21" 1152 × 870 4 : 3 75MAC23" 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 65
Analog ComponentSignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)
HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 48/50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480p) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576p) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50SDTV(480i) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
171
8. Appendix
HDMI/HDBaseT 3DSignalResolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz) 3DFormat
1920 × 1080p
16 : 9
23.98/24FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
25 SideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
29.97/30FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
50 SideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
59.94/60 SideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
1920 × 1080i50 SideBySide(Half)
TopAndBottom
59.94/60 SideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
1280 × 720p
23.98/24FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
25 SideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
29.97/30FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
50FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
59.94/60FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
DisplayPort 3DSignalResolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz) 3DFormat
1920 × 1080p
16 : 9
23.98/24FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
25 SideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
29.97/30FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
50 SideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
59.94/60 SideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
1280 × 720p
23.98/24FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
25 SideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
29.97/30FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
50FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
59.94/60FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopAndBottom
*1 NativeresolutiononXGAType*2 NativeresolutiononWXGAType*3 NativeresolutiononWUXGAType
• Signalsexceedingtheprojector’sresolutionarehandledwithAdvancedAccuBlend.• WithAdvancedAccuBlend,thesizeofcharactersandruledlinesmaybeunevenandcolorsmaybeblurred.• Uponshipment,theprojectorissetforsignalswithstandarddisplayresolutionsandfrequencies,butadjustmentsmayberequired
dependingonthetypeofcomputer.
172
8. Appendix
❸ SpecificationsModel name PA803U/PA723U/PA653U PA853W/PA703W PA903XMethod ThreeprimarycolorliquidcrystalshutterprojectionmethodSpecificationsofmainparts
Liquidcrystalpanel
Size 0.76"(withMLA)×3(aspectratio:16:10) 0.79"(withMLA)×3(aspectratio:4:3)
Pixels(*1) 2,304,000(1920dots×1200lines) 1,024,000(1280dots×800lines)
786,432(1024dots×768lines)
Projection lenses Refertothespecificationsofoptionlens(→ 174page)Lightsource PA803U:420W(280WwhenECOmode
ison)PA723U:400W(280WwhenECOmodeison)PA653U:370W(280WwhenECOmodeison)
PA853W:420W(280WwhenECOmodeison)PA703W:370W(280WwhenECOmodeison)
420W(280WwhenECOmodeison)
Opticaldevice Integrator,DichroicMirror,XDPLightoutput(*2) (*3) ECOOFF PA803U:8000lm
PA723U:7200lmPA653U:6500lm
PA853W:8500lmPA703W:7000lm
9000lm
Contrastratio(*2)(allwhite/allblack) PA803U:10000:1PA723U/PA653U:8000:1
PA853W:10000:1PA703W:8000:1
10000:1
Screensize(throwdistance) 30"to500"(throwdistancedependsonlens)Colorreproducibility 10-bitcolorprocessing(approx.1.07billioncolors)Scanningfrequency Horizontal Analog:15kHz,24to100kHz(24kHzorgreaterforRGBinputs),conformingto
VESAstandardsDigital:15kHz,24to153kHz,conformingtoVESAstandards
Vertical Analog:48Hz,50to85Hz,100,120HzconformingtoVESAstandardsDigital:24,25,30,48Hz,50to85Hz,100,120HzconformingtoVESAstandards
Main adjustment functions ZOOM,FOCUS,LENSSHIFT(Refertothespecificationsofoptionlens→ 174 page),inputsignalswitching(HDMI1/HDMI2/DisplayPort/COMPUTER/HDBaseT),autoimageadjustment,pictureenlarging,picturepositionadjustment,muting(bothvideoandaudio),poweron/standby,on-screendisplay/selection,etc.
Max.displayresolution(horizontal×vertical)
AnalogWUXGA(1920×1200)withAdvancedAccuBlendPixelclockfrequency:lessthan165MHzDigitalQuadHD(4096×2160)withAdvancedAccuBlendPixelclockfrequency:lessthan600MHz(HDBaseT:300MHz)
InputsignalsR,G,B,H,V RGB:0.7Vp-p/75Ω
Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withNegativePolaritySync)Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75ΩH/VSync:4.0Vp-p/TTLCompositeSync:4.0Vp-p/TTLSynconG:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)
Component Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75ΩDTV:480i,480p,720p,1080i,1080p(60Hz)
576i,576p,720p,1080i(50Hz)DVD:Progressivesignal(50/60Hz)
Audio 0.5Vrms/22kΩorgreaterInput/outputconnectors
Computer/Com-ponent
Video input MiniD-Sub15-pin×1Audioinput Stereominijack×1Audiooutput Stereominijack×1(commonforallsignals)
HDMI Video input HDMI®ConnectortypeA×2RJ-450×1,100BASE-TXcompatibleDeepColor(colordepth):8-/10-/12-bitcompatibleColorimetry:RGB,YCbCr444,YCbCr422,YCbCr420,REC2020,REC709,REC601SupportsLipSync,HDCP(*4),4KHDRand3D
Audioinput HDMI:Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz,Samplingbits–16/20/24bits
173
8. Appendix
Model name PA803U/PA723U/PA653U PA853W/PA703W PA903XHDBaseT/Eth-ernet
Video input DeepColor(colordepth):Support8/10/12bitsColorimetry:SupportRGB,YCbCr444,YCbCr422,YCbCr420,REC2020,REC709,REC601SupportLipSync,HDCP(*4),4K,3D,HDR
Video output RJ-45x1,100BASE-TXDeepColor(colordepth):Support8/10/12bitsColorimetry:SupportRGB,YCbCr444,YCbCr422,REC709,REC601SupportLipSync,HDCP(*4),4K,3D
Audioinput Samplingfrequency:32/44.1/48kHzSamplingbit:16/20/24bit
Audiooutput Samplingfrequency:32/44.1/48kHzSamplingbit:16/20/24bits
DisplayPort Video input DisplayPort×1Datarate:5.4Gbps/2.7Gbps/1.62GbpsNo.lanes:1lane/2lanes/4lanesColordepth:8bits,10bits,12bitsColorimetry:RGB,YCbCr444,YCbCr422,REC709,REC601HDCPcompatible(*4)
Audioinput DisplayPort:Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz,Samplingbits–16/20/24bitsPCcontrolterminal D-Sub9-pin×1USBport USBtypeA×1Ethernet/LAN/HDBaseTport RJ-45×1,Supports10BASE-T/100BASE-TXRemoteterminal Stereominijack×13DSYNCoutputterminal 5V/10mA,synchronizedsignaloutputfor3Duse
Usageenvironment Operatingtemperature:41to104°F(5to40°C)(*5)
Operatinghumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)Storagetemperature:14to122°F(-10to50°C)Storagehumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)Operatingaltitude:0to3650m/12000feet(1700to3650m/5500to12000feet:Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALUTITUDE])
Power supply 100-240VAC,50/60HzPower con-sumption
Ecomode OFF PA803U:566W(100-130VAC)/542W(200-240VAC)PA723U:542W(100-130VAC)/518W(200-240VAC)PA653U:506W(100-130VAC)/482W(200-240VAC)
PA853W:566W(100-130VAC)/542W(200-240VAC)PA703W:506W(100-130VAC)/482W(200-240VAC)
566W(100-130VAC)/542W(200-240VAC)
ON 390W(100-130VAC)/376W(200-240VAC)STANDBY Link-up 0.15W(100-130VAC)/0.21W(200-240VAC)
Link-down 0.11W(100-130VAC)/0.16W(200-240VAC)Ratedinputcurrent PA803U:2.6A(100-130V)/6.2A(200-
240V)PA723U:2.5A(100-130V)/6.0A(200-240V)PA653U:2.3A(100-130V)/5.6A(200-240V)
PA853W:2.6A(100-130V)/6.2A(200-240V)PA703W:2.3A(100-130V)/5.6A(200-240V)
2.6A(100-130V)/6.2A(200-240V)
Externaldimensions(W×H×D) 19.8"(width)×6.6"(height)×16.2"(depth)/503(width)×168(height)×411(depth)mm(includingprotrudingparts)19.6"(width)×6.4"(height)×16.0"(depth)/499(width)×164(height)×406(depth)mm(notincludingprotrudingparts)
Weight 22.5lbs/10.2kg(notincludinglens)
174
8. Appendix
*1 Effectivepixelsaremorethan99.99%.*2 Thisisthelightoutputvalue(lumens)whenthe[PRESET]modeissetto[HIGH-BRIGHT].Thelightoutputvalueswilldropto
70%when[ON]isselectedfor[ECOMODE].Ifanyothermodeisselectedasthe[PRESET]mode,thelightoutputvaluemaydropslightly.
*3 CompliancewithISO21118-2012*4 IfyouareunabletoviewmaterialviatheHDMIinput,thisdoesnotnecessarilymeantheprojectorisnotfunctioningproperly.With
theimplementationofHDCP,theremaybecasesinwhichcertaincontentisprotectedwithHDCPandmightnotbedisplayedduetothedecision/intentionoftheHDCPcommunity(DigitalContentProtection,LLC).
Video:HDR,DeepColor,8/10/12-bit,LipSync. Audio:LPCM;upto2ch,samplerate32/44.1/48KHz,samplebit;16/20/24-bit HDMI:SupportsHDCP2.2/1.4 DisplayPort:SupportsHDCP1.4 HDBaseT:SupportsHDCP2.2/1.4*5 95to104°F(35to40°C)–“Forcedecomode”• Thesespecificationsandtheproduct’sdesignaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.
Optionlens(soldseparately)
NP11FL Throwratio0.81:1,F2.3,f=13.2mmNP12ZL Throwratio1.16-1.52:1,F2.20-2.69,f=19.4-25.3mmNP13ZL Throwratio1.46-2.95:1,F1.70-2.37,f=24.4-48.6mmNP14ZL Throwratio2.90-4.68:1,F2.20-2.64,f=48.5-77.6mmNP30ZL Throwratio0.79-1.04:1,F1.90-2.10,f=13.2-17.2mmNP40ZL Throwratio0.79-1.11:1,F2.0-2.5,f=13.3-18.6mmNP41ZL Throwratio1.30-3.02:1,F1.7-2.0,f=21.8-49.7mmNP43ZL Throwratio2.99-5.93:1,F2.2-2.6,f=49.7-99.8mm
NOTE:• Theabovethrowratioisforprojectingon100"screenbyWUXGA.• ForusingNP30ZL,settheECOmodetoON.• UseNP11FLatthehomeposition.
175
8. Appendix
90 (
3.5)
499 (19.6)
250 (9.8)
200
(7.9
)68
(2.
7)41
1 (1
6.2)
164
(6.4
)
168
(6.6
)
503 (19.8)
406
(16.
0)
INP
UT
ME
NU
FO
CU
SS
HIF
T
EX
IT
ZO
OM
EN
TE
R
L-CA
LIB.
HO
ME
PO
SIT
ION
❹ Cabinet Dimensions
Lens center
Lens center
Unit:mm(inch)
176
8. Appendix
❺ Mounting the cable cover (sold separately)
Mountingtheseparatelysoldcablecover(NP10CV)ontheprojectorallowsyouhidethecablesforacleanerappearance.
CAUTION• Aftermountingthecablecover,besuretofastenusingthescrewsprovided.Ifnot,thecablecovercouldfall
anddamagethecablecoverandpossiblyresultingininjury.
• Donotbundlethepowercordandplaceitunderthecablecover.Doingsocouldleadtofire.
• Donotholdthecablecoverwhilemovingtheprojectoranddonotapplyexcessiveforcetothecablecover.Doingsocoulddamagethecablecover,resultingintheprojectorfallingorcausinginjury.
MountingPreparations:
1. Connect the power cord and cables to the projector (the connection cords are omitted from the diagrams).
2. Prepare a Phillips screwdriver.
1. Insertthetworoundprotrusionsontheleftandrightedgesofthecablecover intothegroovesinthebottomoftheprojector to line it up.
NOTE:Becarefulnottoletthepowercordandcablesgetpinchedbythecable cover.
2. Turnthecablecoverscrewclockwise.
• Tightenthescrewsecurely.
2
1
Removing1. Turnthecablecoverscrewcounterclockwiseuntilitturns
loosely.
• Hold thecablecoverwhiledoing this toprevent it fromfalling.
• Thescrewdoesnotcomecompletelyoff.
2.Removethecablecover.
• Turnthecablecoveralittle,thenliftitoff.
1
2
177
8. Appendix
❻ Pin assignments and signal names of main connectorsCOMPUTER IN/ Component Input Connector (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin)
Connection and signal level of each pin
51 42 310
11 12 13 14 156 97 8
Signal LevelVideosignal:0.7Vp-p(Analog)Syncsignal:TTLlevel
Pin No. RGBSignal(Analog) YCbCr Signal1 Red Cr2 GreenorSynconGreen Y3 Blue Cb4 Ground5 Ground6 RedGround CrGround7 GreenGround YGround8 BlueGround CbGround9 NoConnection10 SyncSignalGround11 NoConnection12 Bi-directionalDATA(SDA)13 HorizontalSyncorCompositeSync14 VerticalSync15 DataClock
HDMI 1 IN/HDMI 2 IN Connector (Type A)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 192 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal1 TMDSData2+ 11 TMDSClockShield2 TMDSData2Shield 12 TMDSClock−3 TMDSData2− 13 CEC4 TMDSData1+ 14 Disconnection5 TMDSData1Shield 15 SCL6 TMDSData1− 16 SDA7 TMDSData0+ 17 DDC/CECgrounding8 TMDSData0Shield 18 +5Vpowersupply9 TMDSData0− 19 Hotplugdetection10 TMDSClock+
DisplayPort IN Connector
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 192 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal1 Mainlinklane3− 11 Grounding02 Grounding3 12 Mainlinklane0+3 Mainlinklane3+ 13 Configuration14 Mainlinklane2− 14 Configuration25 Grounding2 15 Supplementarychannel+6 Mainlinklane2+ 16 Grounding47 Mainlinklane1− 17 Supplementarychannel−8 Grounding1 18 Hotplugdetection9 Mainlinklane1+ 19 Return10 Mainlinklane0− 20 +3.3Vpowersupply
178
8. Appendix
HDBaseT IN/Ethernet Port (RJ-45)
12345678
Pin No. Signal1 TxD+/HDBT0+2 TxD−/HDBT0−3 RxD+/HDBT1+4 Disconnection/HDBT2+5 Disconnection/HDBT2−6 RxD−/HDBT1−7 Disconnection/HDBT3+8 Disconnection/HDBT3−
USB-A Port (Type A)
13 24
Pin No. Signal1 VBUS
2 D−3 D+4 Grounding
PC CONTROL Port (D-Sub 9 Pin)
12345
6789 Pin No. Signal1 Unused2 RxD receptiondata3 TxD transmissiondata4 Unused5 Grounding6 Unused7 RTS transmissionrequest8 CTS transmissionallowed9 Unused
179
8. Appendix
❼ Changing the Background Logo (Virtual Remote Tool)Thiswillhelpyouperformoperationssuchasprojector’spoweronoroffandsignalselectionviaaLANconnection.Itisalsousedtosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthelogodataoftheprojector.Afterregisteringit,youcanlockthelogotopreventitfromchanging.
Control FunctionsPowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute,Logotransfertotheprojector,andremotecontroloperationonyourPC.
VirtualRemotescreen
Use this button for changing the background logo.
RemoteControlWindow Toolbar
ForgettingtheVirtualRemoteTool,pleasevisitourwebsiteanddownloadit:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html
NOTE:• RemoteControlWindowisnotavailableforchangingthebackgroundlogo. PleaseseetheHELPmenuoftheVirtualRemoteToolabouthowtodisplaytheToolbar.• Logodata(graphics)thatcanbesenttotheprojectorwithVirtualRemoteToolhasthefollowingrestrictions: (OnlyviaserialorLANconnection)* Filesize:Within256kilobytes* Imagesize:Withintheresolutionoftheprojector* Fileformat:PNG(Fullcolor)
• Logodata(image)sentusingtheVirtualRemoteToolwillbedisplayedinthecenterwiththesurroundingareainblack.• Toputthedefault“NEClogo”backinthebackgroundlogo,youneedtoregisteritasthebackgroundlogobyusingtheimagefile(NP-PA803U/NP-PA723U/NP-PA653U:¥Logo¥necpj_bbwux.png,NP-PA853W/NP-PA703W:¥Logo¥necpj_bbwx.png,NP-PA903X:¥Logo¥necpj_bb_x.png)includedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.
180
8. Appendix
❽ TroubleshootingThissectionhelpsyouresolveproblemsyoumayencounterwhilesettinguporusingtheprojector.
Feature of each indicator
② ③ ④① ① POWERindicator
Thisindicatorinformsthepowerstatusoftheprojector.
② STATUSindicator
Thisindicatorlights/blinkswhenabuttonispressedwhiletheCONTROLPANELLOCKfunctionisutilized,orwhileperformingthelenscalibrationandspecificoperations.
③ LAMPindicator
Thisindicatorinformsthestateoflamp,usagetimeofthelamp,andthestatusofECOMODE.
④ TEMP.indicator
Thisisthetemperatureindicatorinformingtemperaturetroublewhentheambienttemperatureistoohigh/low.
Indicator Message (Status message)
POWER STATUS LAMP TEMP. Projector status
Power is off
Off Off Off Off
InthestateofStandby(StandbymodeisNORMALandthenetworkisready.
Orange (Blink*1)
Off Off Off
InthestateofStandby(StandbymodeisNORMALandthenetworkisunavail-able.
Orange (Blink*2)
Off Off Off
InthestateofStandby(StandbymodeisNORMALandthenetworkisavail-able)
Orange(Light)
Off Off Off
ONtimeastheprogramtimerisactivated.(InthestateofStandby)
Orange (Blink*3)
Off Off Off
InthestateofSleep
Green (Light)
Off Off Off
ONtimeastheprogramtimerisactivated.(InthestateofSleep)
Green (Blink*3)
Off Off Off
Poweredstate(ECOmodeisOFF)
Blue(Light)
Off Green (Light)
Off
181
8. Appendix
POWER STATUS LAMP TEMP. Projector status
Poweredstate(ECOmodeisON)
Blue(Light)
Off Green (Blink*3)
Off
Lenscalibrationimplementrequest.
Status varies
Orange(Blink*4)
Status varies
Off
Performingthelenscalibration
Blue(Light)
Green (Blink*4)
Status varies
Off
OFFTimerisactivated,OFFtimeastheproogramtimerisactivated(Poweredstate)
Blue(Blink*3)
Off Status varies
Off
PreparingforpoweringON
Blue(Blink*5)
Off Off Off
*1 Repetitiontolightonfor1.5seconds/offfor1.5seconds*2 Repetitiontolightonfor1.5seconds/offfor7.5seconds*3 Repetitiontolightonfor2.5seconds/offfor0.5seconds*4 Repetitiontolightonfor0.5seconds/offfor0.5seconds/onfor0.5seconds/offfor2.5seconds*5 Repetitiontolightonfor0.5seconds/offfor0.5seconds
182
8. Appendix
Indicator Message (Error message)
POWER STATUS LAMP TEMP. Projector status Procedure
AbuttonhasbeenpressedwhiletheKEYLOCKisactivated.
The projector's keys are locked. Thesettingmustbecanceledtooperatetheprojector. (→page122)Blue
(Light)Orange(Light)
Status varies
Off
IDnumbersfortheprojectorandtheremote control do not match.
CheckthecontrolIDs(→page123)
Lampreplacementgraceperiod. Thelamphasreachedtheendofitsser-vice life and is now in the replacement graceperiod(100hours).Replacethelamp to new one as soon as possible. (→page156)
Status varies
Off Orange (Blink*5)
Off
Lampreplacementtimeexceeded. Thelamphasexceededitsreplacementtime.Replacethelampimmediately.
Status varies
Off Red(Blink*5)
Off
Preparingtorelightlampafterlightinghas failed.
Waitawhile.
Blue (Blink*5)
Off Green (Blink*5)
Off
Temperatureproblem(IntheForcedECO)
Ambienttemtepratureishigh.Lowertheroom temperature.
Blue(Light)
Off Orange(Light)
Orange(Light)
Temperatureproblem Ambient temperature is out of theoperation temperature. Check if anyobstructionstaysneartheexhaustvent.Red
(Blink*5)Off Off Off
Lampdoesnotlight. Waitatleast1minute,themturnonthepower back on. if the lamp still doesnotlight,contactyourdelaerorservicepersonnel.
Red(Blink*5)
Green (Light)
Red(Light)
Off
Lampcoverproblem Lampcover is notmountedproperly.Mount it properly. (→seepage158).
Red(Blink*5)
Red(Light)
Green (Light)
Off
Lensproblem Thelensisnotmountedproperly,orthenon-supportedlensismounted.Makesure that the lens is supported, andmount it correctly. (→seepage141).
Red(Blink*5)
Red(Light)
Red(Light)
Off
Errorrequiringservicesupport Contactyourdealerorserviceperson-nel.Make sure to check and informindicatorstatusforaskingtorepair.Red
(Light)Status varies
Status varies
Off
*1 Repetitiontolightonfor1.5seconds/offfor1.5seconds*2 Repetitiontolightonfor1.5seconds/offfor7.5seconds*3 Repetitiontolightonfor2.5seconds/offfor0.5seconds*4 Repetitiontolightonfor0.5seconds/offfor0.5seconds/onfor0.5seconds/offfor2.5seconds*5 Repetitiontolightonfor0.5seconds/offfor0.5seconds• Whenthethermalprotectorisactivated: Wheninsidetemperatureoftheprojectorbecomestoohighorlow,thePOWERindicatorstarttoredblinkina
shortcycle.Afterthishappened,thethermalprotectorwillactivateandtheprojectormaybeturnedoff. Inthiscase,pleasetakethebelowmeasures:
- Pulloutthepowerplugfromthewallinlet.- Placetheprojectorincoolplaceifithasbeenplacedinhighambienttemperature.- Cleantheexhaustventifdusthasaccumulatedon.- Leavetheprojectorforaboutonehouruntilinsidetemperaturegetslower.
183
8. Appendix
Explanation on the POWER indicator and standby state
In the state the selected PROFILE for WIRED LAN is available. Available ports in each state(○: Available, ×: Unavailable)
HDBaseT IN/EthernetHDBaseT
OUT/Ethernet
LAN PC CONTROL
○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○
× ○ ○
Indicator : Lights in bluePoweredONstate
Indicator : Lights in greenSleepstate
Indicator : Blinks in orangeStandbystate:Waitingtolinkwiththenetwork
Indicator : Lights in orangeStandbystate:Thenetworkislinked.
Link-upnetwork
Link-down network for ap-prox.10seconds
Powerconsumption
High
Low
PowerOn
Inputsignal
Nooperation/Link-downnetwork/Nosignalinputforapprox.10seconds
• Inputsignal• OperationonthewebbrowserviatheHTTPserver (→Seepage49)
Nooperation/Nocommunicationwiththelink-upnetwork/Nosignalinputforapprox.180seconds
PowerOff
PowerOn
PowerOn
184
8. Appendix
In the state the selected PROFILE for WIRED LAN is unavailable.
Available ports in each state(○: Available, ×: Unavailable)
HDBaseT IN/EthernetHDBaseT OUT/
EthernetLAN PC CONTROL
○ × ○
○ × ○
× × ○
Indicator : Lights in bluePoweredONstate
Indicator : Lights in greenSleepstate
Indicator:Blinksinorange(withlonginterval)Standbystate:Thenetworkisunavailable.
Powerconsumption
High
Low
PowerOn
Inputsignal
Nooperation/Nosignalinputforapprox.10seconds
PowerOff
PowerOn
185
8. Appendix
Common Problems & Solutions(→“Power/Status/LampIndicator”onpage180.)
Problem Check These Items
Does not turn onor shut down
• Checkthatthepowercordispluggedinandthatthepowerbuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrolis on� (→ pages 15, 17)
• Ensurethatthelampcoverisinstalledcorrectly.(→ page 158)• Checktoseeiftheprojectorhastemperatureerror,Ifprojectorinsidetemperatureistoohotorcool,itdisabledto
turn on the projector as the protection� Wait for a moment and try turn on the projector again�• Thelampmayfailtolight.Waitafullminuteandthenturnonthepoweragain.• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700meters
or higher� Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down� If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector� (→ page 115)
If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image for some time and then the projector will display the image� Wait for a moment�
Will turn off • Ensurethatthe[OFFTIMER],[AUTOPOWEROFF]or[PROGRAMTIMER]isoff.(→ page 119, 133)
No picture • Checkiftheappropriateinputisselected.(→ page 19) If there is still no picture, press the INPUT button or one of the input buttons again�
• Ensureyourcablesareconnectedproperly.• Usemenustoadjustthebrightnessandcontrast.(→ page 90)• Ensurethatthelenscoverisopen.(→ page 17)• Resetthesettingsoradjustmentstofactorypresetlevelsusingthe[RESET]intheMenu.(→ page 134)• EnteryourregisteredkeywordiftheSecurityfunctionisenabled.(→ page 43)• IftheHDMIinputortheDisplayPortsignalcannotbedisplayed,trythefollowing.
- Reinstall your driver for the graphics card built in your computer, or use the updated driver� For reinstalling or updating your driver, refer to the user guide accompanied with your computer or graphics
card, or contact the support center for your computer manufacturer� Install the updated driver or OS on your own responsibility� We are not liable for any trouble and failure caused by this installation�
• ThesignalmaynotbesupporteddependingontheHDBaseTtransmissiondevice.Inaddition,RS232Cinterfacemay not be supported�
• BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningonthepower to the notebook PC�
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up�* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-saver or
power management software�• Seealsothepage187�
Picture suddenly becomes dark
• CheckiftheprojectorisintheForcedECOmodebecauseoftoohighambienttemperature.Ifthisisthecase,lowerthe internal temperature of the projector by selecting [HIGH] for [FAN MODE]� (→ page 115)
Color tone or hue is unusual
• Checkifanappropriatecolorisselectedin[WALLCOLOR].Ifso,selectanappropriateoption.(→ page 115)• Adjust[HUE]in[PICTURE].(→ page 91)
Image isn’t square to the screen
• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 21)• Perform[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]whenthetrapezoidisdistorted.(→ page 103)
Picture is blurred • Adjustthefocus.(→ page 23)• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 21)• Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens.
(→ page 162)• Hasthelensbeenshiftedbyanamountexceedingtheguaranteedrange?(→ page 167)• Condensationmayformonthelensiftheprojectoriscold,broughtintoawarmplaceandisthenturnedon.Should
this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens�
Flicker appears on screen
• Set[FANMODE]tootherthan[HIGHALTITUDE]modewhenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700 meters or lower� Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker� Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO]� (→ page 115)
Image is scrolling vertically, horizontally or both
• Checkthecomputer’sresolutionandfrequency.Makesurethattheresolutionyouaretryingtodisplayissupportedby the projector� (→ page 169)
• AdjustthecomputerimagemanuallywiththeHorizontal/Verticalinthe[IMAGEOPTIONS].(→ page 92)
Remote control does not work
• Installnewbatteries.(→ page 12)• Makesuretherearenoobstaclesbetweenyouandtheprojector.• Standwithin40m/1575inchoftheprojector.(→ page 13)
Indicator is lit or blinking
• SeethePOWER/STATUS/LAMPIndicator.(→ page 180)
186
8. Appendix
Problem Check These Items
Cross color in RGB mode
• PresstheAUTOADJ.buttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.(→ page 30)• Adjustthecomputerimagemanuallywith[CLOCK]/[PHASE]in[IMAGEOPTIONS]inthemenu.(→ page 92)
Formoreinformationcontactyourdealer.
187
8. Appendix
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
• PoweronprocessfortheprojectorandthePC.
BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningonthepowertothenotebookPC.
InmostcasestheoutputsignalfromthenotebookPCisnotturnedonunlessconnectedtotheprojectorbeforebeingpoweredup.
NOTE:Youcancheckthehorizontalfrequencyofthecurrentsignalintheprojector’smenuunderInformation.Ifitreads“0kHz”,this means there is no signal being output from the computer. (→ page 137 or go to next step)
• Enablingthecomputer’sexternaldisplay.
DisplayinganimageonthenotebookPC’sscreendoesnotnecessarilymeanitoutputsasignaltotheprojector.WhenusingaPCcompatiblelaptop,acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexternaldisplay.Usu-ally,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysgetstheexternaldisplaytocomeonoroff.Forexample,NEClaptopsuseFn+F3,whileDelllaptopsuseFn+F8keycombinationstotogglethroughexternaldisplayselections.
• Non-standardsignaloutputfromthecomputer
IftheoutputsignalfromanotebookPCisnotanindustrystandard,theprojectedimagemaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.Shouldthishappen,deactivatethenotebookPC’sLCDscreenwhentheprojectordisplayisinuse.EachnotebookPChasadifferentwayofdeactivate/reactivatethelocalLCDscreensasdescribedinthepreviousstep.Refertoyourcomputer’sdocumentationfordetailedinformation.
• ImagedisplayedisincorrectwhenusingaMac
WhenusingaMacwiththeprojector,settheDIPswitchoftheMacadapter(notsuppliedwiththeprojector)ac-cordingtoyourresolution.Aftersetting,restartyourMacforthechangestotakeaffect.
ForsettingdisplaymodesotherthanthosesupportedbyyourMacandtheprojector,changingtheDIPswitchonaMacadaptermaybounceanimageslightlyormaydisplaynothing.Shouldthishappen,settheDIPswitchtothe13"fixedmodeandthenrestartyourMac.Afterthat,restoretheDIPswitchestoadisplayablemodeandthenrestarttheMacagain.
NOTE:AVideoAdaptercablemanufacturedbyAppleComputerisneededforaMacBookwhichdoesnothaveaminiD-Sub15-pin connector.
• MirroringonaMacBook
* WhenusingtheprojectorwithaMacBook,outputmaynotbesetto1024×768unless“mirroring”isoffonyourMacBook.Refertoowner’smanualsuppliedwithyourMaccomputerformirroring.
• FoldersoriconsarehiddenontheMacscreen
Foldersoriconsmaynotbeseenonthescreen.Shouldthishappen,select[View]→[Arrange]fromtheApplemenuandarrangeicons.
188
8. Appendix
❾ PC Control Codes and Cable ConnectionPC Control Codes
Function Code Data
POWER ON 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H
POWER OFF 02H 01H 00H 00H 00H 03H
INPUT SELECT HDMI1 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A1H A9H
INPUT SELECT HDMI2 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A2H AAH
INPUT SELECT DisplayPort 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A6H AEH
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H
INPUT SELECT HDBaseT 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H BFH C7H
PICTURE MUTE ON 02H 10H 00H 00H 00H 12H
PICTURE MUTE OFF 02H 11H 00H 00H 00H 13H
SOUND MUTE ON 02H 12H 00H 00H 00H 14H
SOUND MUTE OFF 02H 13H 00H 00H 00H 15H
NOTE:ContactyourlocaldealerforafulllistofthePCControlCodesifneeded.
Cable ConnectionCommunicationProtocol
Baud rate �����������������������������������������115200/38400/19200/9600/4800 bpsData length ��������������������������������������8 bitsParity �����������������������������������������������No parityStop bit ��������������������������������������������1 bitX on/off ��������������������������������������������NoneCommunications procedure �������������Full duplex
NOTE:Dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns.
PC Control Port (D-SUB 9P)
NOTE 1: Pins 1, 4, 6 and 9 are no used.
NOTE2:Jumper“RequesttoSend”and“CleartoSend”togetheronbothendsofthecabletosimplifycableconnection.
NOTE3:Forlongcablerunsitisrecommendedtosetcommunicationspeedwithinprojectormenusto9600bps.
1 52 43
6 7 98
To GND of PC
To RxD of PC
To TxD of PC
To RTS of PC
To CTS of PC
189
8. Appendix
ABOUT THE ASCII CONTROL COMMANDThisdevicesupportsthecommonASCIIControlCommandforcontrollingourprojectorandmonitor.Please visit our web site for detailed information about the command.http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/pj_manual/lineup.html
HOWTOCONNECTWITHANEXTERNALDEVICETherearetwomethodstoconnecttheprojectorwithanexternaldevicesuchasacomputer.
① Connectionthrutheserialport.
Connectstheprojectortoacomputerbyaserialcable(acrosscable).
② Connectionvianetwork(LAN/HDBaseT)
ConnectstheprojectortoacomputerbyaLANcable.
ConcerningtothetypeofLANcable,pleaseasktoyournetworkadministrator.
CONNECTION INTERFACE① Connectionthrutheserialport.
CommunicationProtocol
Item InformationBaudrate 115200/38400/19200/9600/4800bpsDatalength 8bitsParity bit NoparityStopbit 1bitFlowcontrol NoneCommunicationsprocedure Fullduplex
② Connectionvianetwork
CommunicationProtocol(ConnectionviaLAN)
Item InformationCommunicationspeed Setautomatically(10/100Mbps)Supportedstandard IEEE802.3(10BASE-T)
IEEE802.3u(100BASE-TX,Auto-Negotiation)
UsetheTCPportnumber7142fortransmittingandreceivingcommand.
CommunicationProtocol(ConnectionviaHDBaseT)
Item InformationCommunicationspeed 100MbpsSupportedstandard IEEE802.3u(100BASE-TX,Auto-Negotiation)
UsetheTCPportnumber7142fortransmittingandreceivingcommand.
PARAMETERSFORTHISDEVICEInput command
Inputterminal Response ParameterHDMI1 hdmi1 hdmi1orhdmiHDMI2 hdmi2 hdmi2DisplayPort displayport displayportordisplayport1COMPUTER computer Oneamongcomputer,computer1,vga,vga1,rgb,andrgb1HDBaseT hdbaset hdbasetorhdbaset1
190
8. Appendix
Status commandResponse ErrorStatuserror:cover Lampcovertroubleerror:temp Temperatureerrorerror:fan Fantroubleerror:light Lightsourcetroubleerror:system Systemtroublewarning:light Underthegraceperiodoflampreplacementwarning:filter Filterreplacement
191
8. Appendix
❿ Troubleshooting Check ListBeforecontactingyourdealerorservicepersonnel,checkthefollowinglisttobesurerepairsareneededalsobyreferringtothe“Troubleshooting”sectioninyouruser’smanual.Thischecklistbelowwillhelpussolveyourproblemmore efficiently.* Printthispageandthenextpageforyourcheck.
Frequency of occurrence □ always □sometimes(Howoften?_____________________) □other(__________________)
Power□ No power (POWER indicator does not light blue)� See also “Status
Indicator (STATUS)”�□ Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�□ Lamp cover is installed correctly�□ Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after
lamp replacement�□ No power even though you press and hold the POWER button�
□ Shut down during operation�□ Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�□ Lamp cover is installed correctly�□ [AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO
POWER OFF] function)�□ [OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER]
function)�
Video and Audio□ No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the
projector�□ Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC
first, then start the PC�□ Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector�
• Acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexter-naldisplay.Usually,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwith one of the 12 function keys turns the external display on or off.
□ No image (blue or black background, no display)�□ Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button�□ Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projector’s menu�□ Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input connector□ A message appears on the screen�
(_____________________________________________)□ The source connected to the projector is active and available�□ Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or
the contrast�□ Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the
projector�□ Image is too dark�
□ Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness and/or the contrast�
□ Image is distorted�□ Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you
carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment)�
□ Parts of the image are lost�□ Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST
button�□ Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projector’s menu�□ Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction�
□ Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a computer signal�
□ Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the projector�
□ Some pixels are lost�□ Image is flickering�
□ Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button�
□ Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu�
□ Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal�□ Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from
[HIGH ALTITUDE] to [AUTO]�□ Image appears blurry or out of focus�
□ Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution�
□ Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus�□ No sound�
□ Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the projector�
□ Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level�□ AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only models
with the AUDIO OUT connector)�
Other□ Remote control does not work�
□ No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the remote control�
□ Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the infrared remote controls�
□ Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation�
□ Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)□ [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in
the menu�□ Still unchanged even though you press and hold the INPUT
button for a minimum of 10 seconds�
192
8. Appendix
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used
Projector PC
Blu-ray player
Projector
Model number:Serial No�:Date of purchase:Lamp operating time (hours):Eco Mode: □ OFF □ ONInformation on input signal:
Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHzVertical synch frequency [ ] HzSynch polarity H □ (+) □ (−) V □ (+) □ (−)Synch type □ Separate □ Composite □ Sync on GreenIndicator Message:□ POWERBlinks in □ Blue □ Green □ Orange □ Red [ ] cyclesLights in □ Blue □ Green □ Orange □ Red□ STATUSBlinks in □ Blue □ Green □ Orange □ Red [ ] cyclesLights in □ Blue □ Green □ Orange □ Red□ LAMPBlinks in □ Blue □ Green □ Orange □ Red [ ] cycles Lights in □ Blue □ Green □ Orange □ Red
Remote control model number:
Installation environment
Screen size: inchScreen type: □ White matte □ Beads □ Polarization
□ Wide angle □ High contrastThrow distance: feet/inch/mOrientation: □ Ceiling mount □ DesktopPower outlet connection:□ Connected directly to wall outlet□ Connected to power cord extender or other (the
numberofconnectedequipment______________)□ Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number
ofconnectedequipment______________)
Computer
Manufacturer:
Model number:
Notebook PC □ / Desktop □
Native resolution:
Refresh rate:
Video adapter:
Other:
Videoequipment
VCR, Blu-ray player, Video camera, Video game or other
Manufacturer:
Model number:
Signal cable
NECstandardorothermanufacturer’scable?Model number: Length: inch/m
Distribution amplifierModel number:
SwitcherModel number:
AdapterModel number:
193
8. Appendix
⓫ REGISTER YOUR PROJECTOR! (for residents in the United States, Canada, and Mexico)
Pleasetaketimetoregisteryournewprojector.ThiswillactivateyourlimitedpartsandlaborwarrantyandInstaCareserviceprogram.Visit our web site at www.necdisplay.com,clickonsupportcenter/registerproductandsubmityourcompletedformonline.Uponreceipt,wewillsendaconfirmationletterwithallthedetailsyouwillneedtotakeadvantageoffast,reliablewarrantyandserviceprogramsfromtheindustryleader,NECDisplaySolutionsofAmerica,Inc.
©NECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.2017 7N952552